Belarus 2022 User Manual Eng

MTZ
2022
2022V
2022-0000010РЭ
OPERATION MANUAL
Operation manual has been compiled by V.G. Levkov, engineer of Headquarters Specialized Design
Office
Editor-in-Chief – Chief Designer - M.G. Meleshko
Supervisor for the Issue – Chief, Design Office Bobrovnik A.I., (DTecn.Sci.)
Tractors MTZ 2022/2022V. Operation manual / V.G.Levkov/
The Operation Manual contains description and technical specification of tractors MTZ 2022/2022V
manufactured by Minsk Tractor Works.
Main procedures of machines’ maintenance are set forth, adjustment and servicing data are given.
The Manual is intended for tractor operators engaged in the operation and maintenance of MTZ tractors.
As the policy of MTZ is aimed at the constant improvement of machines under manufacture, changes in
the design of some components, not elucidated in the present edition, may be introduced. Address your
local “MTZ” dealer for more details.
© Minsk Tractor Works RUE, 2003

All rights reserved. The book shall not be reproduced or copied fully or in part without written
permission of Minsk Tractor Works RUE.
Contents
Introduction
1. Safety regulations 5
2. General data 13
3. Technical data 17
4. Controls and instrumentation 27
5. Arrangement and operation of tractor’s components 46
6. Tractor pre-starting procedure 152
7. Tractor ganging-up 158
8. Transportation and towing 185
9. Scheduled maintenance 186
10. Storage 218
11. Supplements 219
Possible malfunctions and correction procedures:
- diesel engine 62
- clutches 71b
- gear box 78
- rear axle 83
- rear PTOS 88
- FDA 99
- brakes 113
- pneumatic system 118
- HTDS 125
- malfunction diagnosis 137
- major malfunctions 139
- average malfunctions 141
- minor malfunctions 142
MTZ 2022/2022V To attention of operators
TO ATTENTION OF OPERATORS!
1. Before starting the tractor, carefully study the present manual and strictly observe all operation and
maintenance directions.
2. Be sure to run-in the tractor for 30 hours. Before the first maintenance (125 hours) load diesel up to
80% of rated power.
3. Your tractor is equipped with range gear box. Ranges are shifted by means of tooth-type couplings
and synchronizers, and gears within each range are selected by synchronizers.
First the range is shifted, then the gear is put in.
TO SHIFT THE RANGE:
- press the clutch pedal and wait until tractor comes to a full stop;
- using the range shifting lever, smoothly and without jerks shift the required range; ranges are shifted
according to recommendations given in section “Tractor pre-starting procedure”.
TO PUT IN GEAR:
- press the clutch pedal;

- smoothly and without jerks pull the gear shifting lever and hold it pressed until the gear is fully put
in;
- smoothly release the clutch pedal.
Change gears on the go within one range only during transport works on hard roadway covering. DO
NOT shift gears when moving in cross-country conditions (ploughed field, sand soil, peat terrain) due to
abrupt stops. In this case move on such terrain using the earlier put in gear. Non-observance of these
regulations will result in premature wear of tooth-type coupling pinion’s splines, as well as damage of
synchronizers.
CAUTION! If, with clutch pedal pressed, ranges and gears are put in with grinding sound,
immediately consult your local dealer and correct malfunction.
4. Observe rules of PTOS engagement. To avoid damage of the shaft, reduction gear pinions and PTOS
during PTOS switching, pull steering lever smoothly with travel delay by 2…4 starting from the middle
of travel from neutral to PTOS switch.
5. The operating and parking brakes should be adjusted only on horizontal ground with the engine shut
down and wedges placed from the front and behind rear wheels to avoid accidental movement of the
tractor.
6. The tractor shall not be operated without a storage battery in the electrical equipment.
MTZ 2022/2022V Introduction
INTRODUCTION
The present manual contains description of the design, technical data, directions for operation and
maintenance of agricultural high-power wheeled tractors MTZ 2022 and MTZ 2202V (reversible
model).
Tractor MTZ 2022 has 4×4 wheel arrangement and has been designed for performing various
agricultural works using mounted, half-mounted and trailing machines and implements, for
transportation, using loading-unloading mechanisms, harvesting complexes, as well as for driving
stationary agricultural machines.
Tractor MTZ 2022V is a reversible model, designed for prolonged operation in the reverse mode.
The difference lies in the additional reversible steering post that includes an additional steering column,
duplicate transmission control, brakes, fuel supply system, as well as special reversible seat to be used
for direct and reverse movement.
Abbreviations and symbols:
DAI - differential automatic interlock;

SB - storage battery;
DL - differential lock;
TDC - top dead center;
PTOS - power take off shaft;
HTDS - hydraulic three-dimensional steering;
RLM - rear lift mechanism;
HLS - hydraulic lift mechanism;
CL - clutch;
GB - gear box;
TC - turbo-compressor;
M - maintenance;
DSM - daily shift maintenance;
IVR - integral voltage regulator;
PIS - power intake shaft;
FDA - front drive axle;
TCM - traction-coupling mechanism;
UCS - universal control system of agricultural machinery;
FPTOS- front power take off shaft;
HPH - high-pressure hose;
MTA - machine-tractor assembly;
SPK - spare parts, tools and appliances kit;
SAC - supercharged air cooler;
SCU - starter control unit;
ILCU - incandescent lamps control unit
MTZ 2022/2022V Introduction
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
The manufacturer uses standard International symbols to describe functioning of devises and controls.
See the manual

Steering manipulations
Brake Fast
Parking brake Slowly

Signal
Forward
Emergency alarm
Back
Fuel Battery charging

Cooling liquid
Cabin ceiling light
Plug of pre-start heater Side lights
Diesel engine revolutions Turn light
diesel oil pressure Headlight
Diesel coolant temperature Lower light
Shut-off/ stoppage
Operation head-lights
On/start up Differential lock

Smooth adjustment
Power take off shaft is on
Lever down Front drive axle is on

MTZ 2022 Introduction
Lever up
Fan
External cylinder “ extending”

Wind shield wiper
External cylinder “ pull-in”

Front wind shield wiper
External cylinder “ equilibrium”
Rear wind shield wiper
Trailer turn signal

Oil pressure in KP
Air pressure in the pneumatic system Oil pressure in HTDS
Braking fluid level in tanks of main

Air filter clogging cylinders
MTZ 2022/2022V Section 1. Safety regulations
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1.1 Strict observance of regulations ensures tractor operating safety, improves its reliability and
increases operation life.
1.1.2 The tractor can be operated by at least 17-yers old persons who received tractor operator
license and passed occupational and fire safety tests.
1.1.3 Carefully study the present manual before using the tractor. Insufficient knowledge of
tractor control and maintenance can be the reason of accidents.
1.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS IN TRANSPORTATION AND REACTIVATION
1.2.1 During transportation and loading/unloading operations follow directions set forth in section
8.
1.2.2 In preserving the tractor and additional equipment follow requirements for fire safety and
hygiene when handling chemical substances, used cleaning cloth and oil paper.
1.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR TRACTOR’S TECHNICAL CONDITION
1.3.1. The tractor must by run-in in compliance with section 6.5. The tractor must be in complete
and technically operational.
1.3.2 Do not allow dismantling of protective housings and fencing being part of design, as well as
other parts and assembly units, that effect safety of its operation (fan protective grid, rear PTOS
housing, etc.)
1.3.3. Technical state of the brake system, steering, illumination and alarm systems, chassis should
comply with safety requirements, relative standards and the present manual.
1.3.4. Trailing agricultural machines and transport trailers should be provided with rigid hitching to
avoid swing and run-over the tractor.
1.3.5. Tractor’s controls should be reliably fixed in operation positions.
1.3.6. Keep all warning plates clean. Damaged or lost plates should be replaced for new ones.
1.3.7. Don’t allow leakage of electrolyte, water, fuel, oil and braking fluid.
1.3.8. Make the right choice of summer and winter fuel grades. To avoid moisture condensation
during the night, fill in the tank at the end of each working day. Use only oils and lubricants
recommended by manufacturers. The use of other greases and lubricants is STRICTLY
FORBIDDEN.
1.4. SAFETY REGULATIONS IN diesel shut-down knob back, and brake the
TRACTOR OPERATION tractor.
1.4.11. Switch on an independent rear PTOS
CAUTION! Don’t start the engine being drive only with non-operational diesel, or at
out of operator’s working place. Always be minimum frequency of crankshaft rotation at
inside the cabin on the operator’s seat when the time of starting up or shutting down the
starting the engine and manipulating diesel.
controls. 1.4.12. When the tractor operates without
using rear PTOS, put the switching handle of
1.4.1. Before starting the engine, the parking the independent drive and PTOS control
brake should be switched on lever of the handle in position “switched off”.
power take-off shaft (PTO) should be in the 1.4.13. To switch on PTOS, move the control
“brake” position, levers of changing ranges lever smoothly with 2…4 s delay in the
and putting in gears – in “Neutral” position. middle of the travel from neutral to the PTOS
The switch of the gear box pump drive should switching time to avoid breakage of the drive
be in the driving position “off the diesel”. shaft, reduction gear pinions and PTOS end.
1.4.2 Before starting movement, give a
warning signal to those around and working
on trailing machines, make sure the parking-
stand-by brake is switched off, and slowly
start the movement. During transportation
works use fastening belts (supplied as option).
1.4.3. Don’t leave the tractor while on the
move.
Before leaving the cabin, switch the PTOS
off, shut down the diesel, engage the parking
brake and pull out the starter key.
1.4.4. Don’t operate the tractor inside the
premises with not sufficient ventilation,
exhaust fumes may be the cause of fatal
outcome!
1.4.5. If the diesel or steering fail immediately
stop the tractor. Remember, that much more
effort should be applied to the steering wheel
to drive the tractor with the diesel stopped.
Don’t work under lifted agricultural
implements. Don’t leave mounted tools in the
lifted position during prolonged stops.
1.4.6. If the tractor’s front part breaks away
off the ground when mounting heavy
machines on the hinging mechanism, place
front ballast loads.
1.4.7. No passengers are allowed in the cabin
during tractor operation (A passenger is
allowed only if an additional seat is installed
in the cabin).
1.4.8. Don’t operate the tractor with defective
instrumentation.
1.4.9. Don’t allow the diesel fuming and
drastic drop in revolution frequency due to
overloading.
1.4.10. During an accident, or excessive
increase of revolutions frequency of the diesel
crankshaft, immediately stop fuel supply, pull
MTZ 2022/2022V Section 1. Safety requirements
1.4.14. After disconnecting PTOS driven

machines, remove the cardan drive and cover
the PTOS end with a protective cup.
1.4.15. Do not lower the mounted machine by 1.4. 26. When tractor assemblies operate in
putting RLM control lever in position “forced the column, the interval between them should
lowering”. be 30 meters minimum.
1.4.16. Before starting the diesel, put gears 1.4.27. The movement of the tractor assembly
and ranges shifting levers in neutral position. on slippery roads with DAI switched on is
During starting there should be no people allowed at the speed of 12 km/h maximum.
under, in front and at the back of the tractor,
as well as between the tractor and the
machine connected to it.
1.4.17. When hitching and mounting
agricultural machinery and tools to the tractor,
the operator’s assistant should keep himself at
safe distance till the full stop. Hitching
(mounting) can be started only upon
operator’s signal.
1.4.18. In case of malfunctioning immediately
stop the tractor and correct the problem.
1.4.19. When ganging the tractor up to
agricultural machinery, observe safety
regulations for these machines’ operation.
1.4.20. Before mounting agricultural
machines on the tractor, make sure automatic
grips of lower and upper RLM tie-rods are
clean and serviceable. Operation with non-
serviceable, clogged with mud and foreign
particles interior surfaces of automatic grips,
is not allowed.
1.4.21. Before lifting and lowering of a
mounted agricultural tool, and when the
tractor is turning, make sure in advance there
is no danger to touch or brush against any
obstacle.
1.4.22. To avoid damage of the tractor or an
agricultural machine, movement and turning
of the tractor with a mounted agricultural
machine can be started only after putting
PTOS control lever in “brake” position.
1.4.23. Lower the mounted machine in the
operational position and lift it in the transport
position only during rectilinear movement of
the assembly.
1.4.24. The cardan shaft that passes rotation
of the tractor’s PTOS to the assembly tools
should be fenced.
1.4.25. Make sure that any additional
equipment or auxiliary device is properly
installed, and also that they are intended for
use with your tractor.
Remember, that your tractor, if improperly
operated, can be dangerous for you and other
people. Don’t use equipment that is not
intended to be installed on the tractor.
MTZ 2022/2022V Section 1. Precautionary measures
1.4.28. When operating on slopes, increase  check brakes functioning;

the tractor’s wheel track to maximum.  interlock brakes pedals, check and adjust,
1.4.29 Don’t make sharp turns when fully if necessary, simultaneous functioning
loaded and at high movement speed. thereof;
1.4.30. During dark time operation switch on  check functioning of the parking brake;
illumination devices.  check the state of light and sound alarm
1.4.31. Stop the diesel and switch off PTOS to instruments;
clean, lubricate, adjust and repair the tractor.  transport trailers should have rigid
1.4.32. When using PTOS driven equipment hitching and additionally connected with
brake the PTOS end and shut down the diesel reserve chain or steel rope;
before leaving the cabin.  never descend the hill with gear switched
1.4.34. When operating stationary PTOS off (coasting). Use one gear for moving
driven machines, always engage the parking uphill and downhill;
brake and block rear wheels on both sides.
 don’t operate with a trailer without self-
Make sure, the machine is securely fixed. contained brakes, if its mass exceeds half
1.4.35. Make sure, PTOS end is properly
of the total actual tractor’s mass. The
protected, and if PTOS is not used, replace faster you move and the larger is the mass
PTOS end cup. being towed, the longer safe distance
1.4.36. The tractor is allowed to operate should be.
across slopes with up 9° steepness only in the
daytime at the speed of 10 km/hour maximum
and wheel span 1800 mm minimum.
1.4.37. When operating or moving in the
transmission line area, the distance from the
top point of the tractor assembly to wires
should not be less than:
TL voltage, 11 20- 110 154- 330-

up to kV 25 220 500
Horizontal
distance, m 1.5 2 4 6 9
Vertical
distance, m 1 2 3 4 6
1.4. 38. Don’t allow operation with heavy

machines without front ballast load.
1.5. SAFETY REGULATIONS DURING

TRANSPORT WORKS AND TRACTOR
TOWING
1.5.1. During transportation works observe

traffic regulations in force on the territory of
the country.
1.5.2. Transportation works can be performed
only by operators with at least two years
tractor driving experience and having passed
examinations in traffic regulations.
1.5.3. When using the tractor in transportation
works:
 increase tractor’s wheel span to at least
1900 mm;
1.5.5. Before starting the work, switch the 1.6.4. To avoid fuel splashing during
compressor on, check the state of the brakes mechanical tractor refueling, remove meshed
pneumatic drive, air pressure in the system. filter from the fuel tank neck. The meshed
Correct malfunctioning revealed. filter is intended only for manual refueling in
1.5.6. Trailers ganged up to the tractor, should field conditions.
be equipped with the braking system capable 1.6.5. To examine places to be controlled and
of: adjusted, use portable lamp with voltage not
a) trailer braking while on the move; more than 36 V. The lamp should be
b) brakes engagement when the trailer is protected by wire mesh.
disconnected from the tractor;
c) trailer retaining when parked on slopes;
d) prevention of trailer’ s pushing action on
the tractor during sharp change in
movement speed.
The trailer should be connected to the
tractor by a reserve chain.
1.5.7. Transportation of people in trailers is
not allowed.
1.5.8. To avoid overturning, be careful when
driving the tractor. Select safe speed in
accordance with road condition, in particular,
when moving on the cross-country terrain,
crossing ditches, slopes and during sharp
turns.
1.5.9. Movement speed when making a turn
should not exceed 5 km/hour, on slippery
road – 3 km/hour. Put in 1st, or 2nd gear when
descending the hill. Movement speed on rail
road approach lines should not exceed 10
km/hour.
1.5.10. During trailer loading (unloading)
brake the tractor with the parking-reserve
brakes.
1.5.11. Tractor can be towed with non-
operational HTDS at the speed of 10 km/hour
maximum and to the distance of 5 km.
1.5.12. When used with a trailer on public
roads, the tractor should have road train
identification sign switched on according to
“Traffic regulations”.
1.6. SAFETY REGULATIONS DURING

MAINTENANCE
1.6.1. Maintenance should be carried out on

horizontal site, with diesel shut down and
wedges placed on both sides of rear wheels.
PTOS end must be braked, mounted machines
lowered and tractor braked.
1.6.2. To lift the tractor use the jack, and
when raised put supports under the front axle
beam, half-axles of rear wheels or basic parts
of the tractor frame.
1.6.3. Observe safety regulations when using
lifting-transport mechanisms.
__________________________________________________________________________
1.6.6. The tools and appliances used for

maintenance should be serviceable, serve the 1.6.11. To avoid danger of explosion, don’t
purpose and be safe in use. allow open flame source close to the diesel
1.6.7. Don’t inflate tires without gauging fuel system and storage batteries
pressure. 1.6.12. To avoid burns be careful when
1.6.8. When servicing storage batteries: draining coolant from the cooling system, hot
a) avoid electrolyte dropping on skin; oil from diesel, hydraulic system and
b) wipe batteries with cloth soaked in transmission.
ammonium solution (salmiac); 1.6.13. To assembly and dismantle the diesel
c) when adjusting electrolyte level add only use steel rope fixing it to eye bolts provided
distilled water; on the diesel.
d) do not check the battery charging by short 1.6.14. Switch off SB when using electrical
circuiting terminals; welding during maintenance works.
e) do not connect the storage battery with 1.6.15. Do not introduce any alterations in the
reverse polarity. tractor design, or its components without
1.6.9. To avoid failure of electronic units in notifying the manufacturer. Otherwise, claims
the electrical equipment system observe the under the warranty are not accepted.
following precautionary measures: 1.6.15a The tractor shall not be operated
 do not disconnect SB terminals with the without SM as part of the electrical
diesel in operation. This results in peak equipment.
voltage in the charge circuit and
inevitably causes diodes and transistors
failure.
 Do not disconnect electrical wiring before
diesel stoppage and switching off all
electric switches;
 Do not cause short circuiting arising due
to improperly connected wiring. Short
circuiting or wrong polarity lead to
damage of diodes and transistors;
 Do not switch of the electrical equipment
system using the starter and instruments’
switch, as well as “ground” switch before
diesel completely stops;
 Do not connect SB to the electrical
equipment system without prior
examination of terminals' polarity and
voltage;
 Do not check electric current “by
sparking”, as this will immediately lead to
transistors’ break down.
1.6.10. The cooling system operates under
pressure, sustained by the valve installed in
the surge tank cover. It’s dangerous to remove
cover on hot diesel. To avoid face and hands
burn, be careful when opening the tank neck
cover of the hot diesel. Put cloth on the plug
and use gloves.
MTZ 2022/2022V Section 1. Safety requirements
________________________________________________________________________________
1.7. FIRE SAFETY REGULATIONS 1.8. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS IN

STORAGE
1.7.1. The tractor should be equipped with
fire-fighting implements – a spade and a fire 1.8.1. When putting the tractor for storage,
extinguisher. during maintenance in storage, or removing
1.7. 2. Never refuel the tractor with diesel from storage, observe relative requirements of
functioning. the present section and safety regulations
1.7.3. Do not smoke when refueling the under GOST (state standard) 9.014-78.
tractor.
1.7.4. Do not fill in the fuel tanks to the full.
Leave some space for fuel expansion.
1.7.5. Never add benzene or mixtures to the
diesel fuel. These combinations may increase
danger of explosion and inflammation.
1.7.6. Tractors’ parting lot, fuel and lubricants
storage sites should be surrounded with at
least 3 m wide ploughed zone and provided
with fire-fighting implements.
1.7.7. Refuel the tractor mechanically with
diesel shut down. Use illumination at night.
The use of buckets for filling in fuel tanks is
not recommended.
1.7.8. Remove vegetation remains from
assembly units and parts when using electric
and gas welding during repair works under
field conditions.
1.7.9. Do not soil the muffler and collector
with dust, fuel, straw, etc.
1.7.10. Do not allow reeling of straw up the
rotating parts of machines ganged up to the
tractor.
1.7.11. When rinsing parts and assembly units
in kerosene or benzene, take measures to
exclude inflammation of rinsing fluids’
vapors.
1.7.12. Do not allow tractor’s operation in fire
dangerous areas with hood and other
protective items taken off heated diesel parts.
1.7.13. Do not use open flame to heat oil in
the oil pan, during filling in fuel tanks or
burning out soil in the radiator core.
1.7.14. When place of ignition arises, bury it
with sand, cover with tarpaulin or some other
dense material. Use carbon dioxide fire
extinguisher. Do not pour water on burning
fuel.
1.7.15. Check that during diesel operation
there were no inflammable materials close to
the exhaust collector and muffler.
1.7.16. When harvesting hay or straw, or
operating in fire highly dangerous areas, use
spark traps complete with muffler in the
exhaust system, or use them separately.
1.8.2. During storage the tractor should be

placed on specially manufactured supports or
trestle to exclude its turning over or accidental
shifting.
1.9. HYGIENE REQUIREMENTS
1.9.1. First aid kit should be supplied with

bandages, iodine, salmiac, boric vaseline,
validole and analgine.
1.9.2. Depending on environmental
conditions, use natural cabin ventilation, or
air conditioner/ heater.
MTZ 2022/2022V Section 2. General data.
2. GENERAL DATA
Tractor’s brakes –hydraulically driven, wet,
Farm high-power wheeled tractor MTZ 2022 multi-disk, installed on drive pinions of
of 3.0 class traction with 4 x 4 wheel vehicle-borne gears.
arrangement is designed for different The cabin is solid, comfortable, air-
agricultural works using mounted, half- conditioned, it has cylindrical shape and up-
mounted, trailing machines, loading- to-date exterior and interior design. To
unloading mechanisms, harvesting improve operator’s working conditions the
complexes, for driving stationary agricultural tractor is provided with toned, spherical,
machinery, including transportation in various injury-safe glass, sun-proof curtains, enlarged
climatic zones. cabin space, more convenient location of side
The tractor is equipped with an in-line six- panel levers, additional folding back seat,
cylinder diesel engine with turbo-charging additional rear window. Frameless door and
and intermediate cooling of supercharged air, glued windscreen spherical glass provide
having rated power of 210 h/p with 2100 excellent all-round visibility.
rev/min of the crankshaft. Lining and wings are of modern design.
Straight behind the diesel engine there are
power transmission mechanisms, the clutch,
gear box, rear axle with differential interlock,
rear power-take-off shaft with four-speed
independent drive (590; 720; 1105 and 1460
rev/min at 2100 rev/min of the diesel engine).
The clutch – two-disk, dry permanently
closed, with hydrostatic control drive.
Gear box – synchronized, fixed-ratio, range-
type, allows 24 front movement gears and 12
reverse movement gears.
The tractor chassis – drive rear wheels, drive
and guide front wheels. Front wheels’ tires
size – 420/70R24, rear wheels’ tires size –
580/70R42.
The front drive axle of MTZ: portal, with one-
piece beam and planetary-cylindrical wheel
reduction gears.
Tractor’s steering – hydraulic, three-
dimensional, to ensure ease and simplicity of
tractor control in different applications.
Additional balance loads are installed on the
front beam to improve tractor’s coupling
characteristics and steering ability.
Hydraulic system of RLM control with three-
section distributor, electro-magnetically
controlled governor, gauges, panels and
BOSCH electronic control unit provide tractor
operation with agricultural machines and
implements using power, position and mixed
control of implements position relative to the
tractor frame, and power take-off to drive
agricultural machinery tools. The tractor is
equipped with a pneumatic system that
controls hydraulically driven trailers’ brakes
and one-tube and two-tube pneumatic brakes
system.
MTZ 2022/2022V Section 2. General data
Two fuel tanks with total capacity of 357 l are

installed under the cabin floor on the right
side of the tractor.
The diesel is shielded with a forward – swung
hood and removable sides. In the open
position the hood is fixed with a rod.
Optionally, the tractor can be supplied with
auxiliary equipment (RLM cross-bar,
additional seat, PTO-driven front mounted
mechanism, etc.).
Tractor MTZ 2022V is equipped with
reversible steering post intended for
prolonged operation in the reverse mode with
agricultural machinery mounted on the rear
hinge mechanism.
SERIES NUMBERS OF TRACTOR’S

COMPONENTS
The company’s plate with series numbers of

the tractor and diesel is attached in the cabin
right-side niche on the tractor rear.
Series number of the tractor is duplicated on

the right-side frame girder, and right-side
plate of the front ballast.
Series diesel number is duplicated on the

company’s plate fixed to the cylinder block
(on the left side).
Series number of the diesel turbo-compressor.
Clutch series number.

Series chassis number is punched on the right

side of the rear axle body
Series FDA number is punched on the FDA

body in frond of the tractor.
The cabin series number and number of the

OECD certificate. The plate is fixed in the
cabin right-side niche under company’s plate.
MTZ 2022/2022V Section 3. Technical data
3. TECHNICAL DATA
Dimensions
Left-side view
Front view Rear view

General data
Description Unit of measurement Value

Type of tractor - Agricultural, general purpose
Tractor make - MTZ
Tractor model - 2022; 2022V
Rated travel speed using tires Km/hour
580/70R38 at nominal diesel
crankshaft rotation:
Forward motion
Range 1
Gear 1 1.79
Gear 2 2.38
Gear 3 3.10
Gear 4 3.99
Gear 5 5.13
Gear 6 6.65
Range II
Gear 1 3.46
Gear 2 4.60
Gear 3 5.99
Gear 4 7.71
Gear 5 9.90
Gear 6 12.85
Range III
Gear 1 5.35
Gear 2 7.10
Gear 3 9.24
Gear 4 11.90
Gear 5 15.29
Gear 6 19.83
Range IV
Gear 1 10.33
Gear2 13.72
Gear 3 17.85
Gear 4 22.98
Gear 5 29.53
Gear 6 38.30
Rear motion
Range I
Gear 1 2.51
Gear 2 3.34
Gear 3 4.35
Gear 4 5.60
Gear 5 7.20
Gear 6 9.34
Continuation of table 3.1
Description Unit of Value
measurement
Range II
Gear 1 Km/h 4.86
Gear 2 6.46
Gear 3 8.40
Gear 4 10.82
Gear 5 13.90
Gear 6 18.03
Nominal traction force kN ( kgs) 30 (3000)
Tractor dimensions (nominal)
* length in travel condition (with mm 5230 +/- 50
loads), rear hinge system including
* width, at ends of rear wheels half- mm 2500 +/- 20
axles
* height, cabin top mm 3090 +/- 30
Tractor wheelbase mm 2920 +/- 50
Tractor wheelspan mm
* front wheels (stepwise) mm 1640-2190
* rear wheels (stepless-stepwise) mm 1800-2500
Angle of rolling static stability, degrees 35
minimum
Ground clearance ( with standard
tires)
under rear axle body mm 430 (550 for tires 580/70R42)
Minimum turning radius from the
center of the track of the outside
front wheel with 1800 mm m 5.3
wheelspan and braked inside rear
wheel
Tractor mass ( as dispatched from kg 6830 +/- 100 ( 6900 +/- 100 - 2022V)
the manufacturer)
Allowable load on axles (not kN
accounting for tires carrying
capacity):
* front axle 50
* rear axle 75
Braking distance at the speed of 30 m 13
km/h with cold brakes, maximum
Depth of ford being crossed m 0.85
Full mass of towed trailer ( brakes kg 25000
of the tractor and trailer
interlocked)
DIESEL
Type - D-260.4 or D-260.4C2
Number of cylinders pieces 6
Firing order - 1-5-3-6-2-4
Cylinder diameter mm 110
Piston stroke mm 125
Displacement volume L ( cm)3 7.12 (7120)
Description Unit of
measure Value
ment
Compression ratio - 15.0
Cooling system - Fluid-type with forced circulation of cooling fluid
from centrifugal pump
Lubrication system - Combined
Oil cooling system - In-built fluid-oil heat exchanger
Thermal mode adjustment - Automatic, using two thermostats and a ventilator
with viscous coupling driven by thermal- power
element depending on the diesel temperature
Rated diesel power hp (kW) 210 (154)
Operational diesel power hp (kW) 200 (147)
Specific fuel consumption at rated g/h.p.h 162 (220)
power (g/kW.
h)
Specific fuel consumption at G/h.p.h 170 (230)
operational power (g/kW.h
)
Rated frequency of crankshaft rotation Rev/min 2100 + 40 -25
Maximum frequency of idle run Rev/min 2275
rotation, max.
Maximum stable frequency of idle run Rev/min 800
rotation
Frequency of crankshaft rotation at Rev/min 1400
maximum torque
Maximum torque value N.m ( 807.5 (82.3)
kgs.m)
Correct coefficient of torque allowance, 15 +10 / -3
minimum %
High pressure fuel pump - 363.1111005-40.04 (YAZDA) or PP6M10P1f-3493
“Motoplan”, Czeck Republic
Angle of lead of power supply to TDC degrees YAZDA: 19-21 0 (D-260.4); 16-18 O (D-260.4C);
“Motorpal” 21-23 (D260.4); 17-19 (D-260.4C)
type - 6- plunger, in-line (“Motorpal”, YAZDA)
Direction of camshaft rotation - Right-side
Type of booster pump - Piston, eccentric driven
Hand mump type - piston
Rotation frequency governor - Variable-speed with automatic fuel supply dresser at
starting regimes and pneumatic corrector
injector - 17/171.1112010-01 (D-260.4); 17/171/1112010-0101
(D-260.4C)
MTZ 2022/2022V Section3. Technical data
________________________________________________________________________________
Air purifier “Donaldson” - with dry three-step purification, with built-in mono separator
Starting system - Electric starter with pre-start heating plug
Mass of the dry diesel kg 700 +/- 3%
Make of turbo-compressor - TKP-7 or S2A; “Shwitzer” K27 (TBP4 “Garret”
(France) or G22-02 “Turbo” (Check republic) – for D-
260.4C)
Relative oil consumption, in % to
fuel consumption during warranty % 1.1
service life, max.
Relative oil consumption for
burning loss after 60-hors % 0.4
operation, in % to fuel
consumption, max.
POWER TRANSMISSION
Clutch - Friction-type, dry, constantly closed, two-disk
Clutch control drive - Hydrostatic
Gear box - 24F + 12R; mechanical, stepwise, with constant mesh
gears, shifting between six gears in each of four ranges
in forward motion, and two ranges of reverse motion is
effected by synchronizers, ranges are shifted by tooth-
type couplings and synchronizers.
Rear axle - Supplied with final drive- a pair of cone gears with
circular teeth; differential; vehicle-borne drives – a pair
of cylindrical gears and final planetary-type drives;
with mechanical differential interlock with hydraulic
drive and electric- hydraulic control.
Front drive axle MTZ - Portal, beam-type with planetary-cylindrical final
drives. The final drive -–a pare of cone gears with
circular teeth, with self-lock differential.
FDA drive - From GB via friction electrically-hydraulically
controlled coupling, cardan shaft
FDA control - Electrical-hydraulic distributor provides automatic
control and forced drive switching on.
Brakes control drive - Hydrostatic, isolated
Brakes - Wet, multi-disk, effect rear, and via FDA drive disk
brake – front wheels. Control is interlocked with
trailer’s brake.
Parking-reserve brake - Multi-disk, wet, integrated with working brakes, with
an individual mechanical drive. Control is interlocked
with the pneumatic drive of trailer’s brakes.
The drive for trailers’ brakes - Pneumatic one-pipe ( optionally – two-pipe), interlocked
control with tractor’s brakes control
Pneumatic system pressure limited Mpa 0.85…1.00
by safety valve (kgs/c (8.5…10)
m2)
Controller-sustained pressure Mpa 0.65…0.80
(kgs/c (6.5…8.0)
m2)
REAR PTO
Drive - Four-speed, independent
End rotation frequency

* independent drive (standard) Rev/m 540 at 1924 rev/min of the diesel to transmit power not
in more than 60 kW; 1000 at 1909 rev/min of the diesel to
transmit full power
* independent (economical) drive Rev/m 540 at 1603 and 1000 at 1615 rev/min of the diesel
in
Size of the end and rotation - Ends of type 1; 1C*; 2; 3 ( clockwise, if one looks at the
direction end face)
FRAME, CHASSIS
Tractor’ frame - Half-frame
Frame suspension - Stiff
Chassis - Front and rear drive wheels with pneumatic tires
Guide front wheels
Rear wheels can be doubled using an attachment
Tires :
front wheels 4220/70R24; 480/65R24
rear wheels 580/70R42;580/70R38; 650/65R42
STEERING
Type - Hydraulic, three-dimensional
Type of supply pump - Gear
Displacement volume cm3/re 14-16
v
Rated pressure made by supply Mpa 16
pump (kgs/c (160)
m2)
Rotation direction - Left-side
Type of metering pump - Gerotory
Displacement volume cm3/re 160
v
Pressure of safety valve adjustment Mpa 14+ 1.5
(kgs/c (140 + 15)
m2)
Pressure of shock proof valves Mpa ( 20 +2
adjustment kgs/c (200 + 20)
m2)
Type of turning mechanism - Two-rod hydraulic cylinder or two hydraulic cylinders
50 x 250 mm in diameter
Force of steering wheel turn with N 30
operational supply pump
Steering wheel play degrees 25
*) Available in spare parts kit
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Hydraulic system type Remote-cylinder hydraulic system allowing for power,
- position and mixed control of agricultural machines
position and dampening of agricultural machinery
swing in travel position
Pump - Gear-type, right-hand rotation
Model - NSH32M-3
Drive - From diesel via the pinion of PTO independent drive
Maximum pump capacity l/min 56
Pressure of safe valve adjustment Mpa 20 -2.0 (200 –20)

(kgs/cm2)
Hitch cylinders (2 pieces) Mm TS 90 x 250
Distributor - 3-section, 4-position, flow type by BOSCH
Controller - Electric-hydraulic, type EHR4 by BOSCH
Electric magnets supply voltage V 12
REAR HITCH
Hitch mechanism - Articulated, four-link, category 3
Load- lifting capacity, with load kN (kgs) 46
gravity center 610 mm off the (4600)
suspension axis
TRACTION-COUPLING MECHANISM
Type - General-purpose; includes towing mechanism (yoke),
and (optional) connecting device of “python” type, and
trailing mechanism ( towing bar)
Towing mechanism (TSU-38) - Lifting-type, height adjusted
*distance from PTO face to towing - 400 +/- 10
yoke opening axis in horizontal
plane
* distance from ground surface to mm 400-850 ( in 65 mm)
horizontal towing yoke axis
CABIN
See section 2 “General data” - One-seat, with safe rigid frame, thermal-noise-
vibration proof, with a heating system, ventilation and
air heater-type filtration, equipped with a seat adjusted
according to operator’s weight and height, rear view
mirrors, air conditioner, front and rear windshields’
wipers and washers, illumination ceiling lamp and
radio set compartment. Cabin doors are lockable, the
left door is locked with a key
Reversible steering post (2022V)

* steering column - Additional, with a metering pump
* fuel supply control - Duplicated, steel rope
* clutch and brakes control - Duplicated pedal drives for clutch and brakes control
* seat - Main seat, reversed by 180 0 by reversing mechanism
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION
Rated voltage:
* tractor-system voltage V 12
* starting system V 24
Supply system - Storage batteries ( 2 pcs.) 12 V, capacity 120 A.h each,
connected in parallel, starting discharge at –18 0C –
500A, 12V generator, 2000W power, alternated current
with built-in rectifier and voltage regulator
Illumination and light alarm - - front road illumination head lights (high beam,
system lower beam) – 4 pieces;
- front (2 pcs.) and rear (4 pcs.) operation headlights,
containing side lights and tractor turning alarm
lights;
- rear lamps ( 2 pieces) containing side lights,
turning alarm lights and brake alarm lights;
cateyes;
- license plate illumination lamp;
- cabin ceiling light;
- emergency alarm lights
Sound alarm system - A set of two horn tone signals and one horn-less signal
Emergency sound alarm system - Buzzer ( upon diesel oil pressure drop or rise of
cooling liquid temperature above rated value
Tachometer-speedometer Electrical ( complete with programming panel)

Control lamps Signaling system of high beam; tractor and trailers’
turns, parking brake, air filter clogging, HTDS oil
pressure; engagement of differential and FDA
interlocking; braking fluid pressure in brake master
cylinders; diesel starting up, means of easing diesel
start up.
BALLAST LOADS
Mass of one load kg 45 +/- 1.5
Total mass kg 510 +20 + additionally 420
AUXILLIARY WORK EQUIPMENT ( optional)
Front mounting mechanism (MM) - MM-2

* load-lifting capacity of lower tie-rod axis kg 250
Automatic front MM coupling - SA-1
Crossbar of the rear hinging mechanism
* distance from PTO end face to hitching point mm 675
* vertical movement of hitching point mm 200-980 (stepless)
* diameter of connecting opening mm 32
* horizontal movement of hitching point mm 400 (on both sides space 8 )
* vertical static load kgs 600
Hitching device ( towing bar):
* distance from PTO end face to hitching point mm 400; 500

in horizontal plane
* distance from ground surface to hitching point mm 465
* allowable vertical load:
* with 400 mm overhang from PTO end face kgs 2000
* with 500 mm overhang from PTO end face kgs 1500
Support for rear wheels doubling pieces 2
Additional seat - For a passenger
Front PTO:
* drive - Independent, one-speed
* rotation frequency of the PTO end with 1845

rev/min rotation frequency of the diesel rev/min 1000
crankshaft
* direction of the end movement - Clockwise (when looking at the end)
* end size - PTO 2; 21 slots


Transmitted power, maximum h.p. 60
(kW) (44)
Towing- hitching device TSU-2P “Python” - Non-adjustable
Outside diameter of the connecting rod mm 44.6
*distance from PTO end face to the center mm 110
* allowable vertical load kgs 3000

* distance from ground surface to hitching mm 530
point
MTZ 2022/2022V Section 4. Controls
4 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

10. Indicator of oil pressure in the diesel
lubrication system
11. A block of control lamps
12. Tachometer-speedometer
13. Windshield visor
14. Air distributors
15. Recirculation shutters
16. A set of switches ( operation headlights,
heater fan, rear windshield wiper, headlights “
road train”
17. Door lock
18. Steering wheel
19. Tachometer-speedometer control
20. Switch of front windshield wiper and
washer
21. Switch of the emergency light alarm
22. Central light switch
23. Control lever of steering column tilt fix
24. Pedal of fuel supply control
25. Brake pedal
26. Clutch pedal
26a. Diesel shut down lever (when fuel pump
with two control levers is installed)
6. Indicator of air pressure in the pneumatic

system
7. Fuel level indicator
8. Voltage indicator;
9. Indicator of cooling fluid temperature
1. *Front operation headlights switch ( on
cabin railing)
2. Starter and instruments’ switch
3. Multifunctional switch ( turn indicator,
high beam, lower beam, sound alarm)
4. Storage battery remote switch
(combination of instruments (pos. 5, 6, 7,
8, 9, 10)
5 Oil pressure indicator in GB
*) road headlights switch (on cabin railing –

optional)
27. Gear shift lever

27a. Push button of switching lower (L) step of GB reduction gear
27b.Push button of switching higher (H) step of GB reduction gear
27c. Indicator of switching on lower step of GB reduction gear
27d. Indicator of switching on higher step of GB reduction gear
28. Range shift lever
29. Fuel supply control lever
30. PTO switching lever
31. Control unit of hydraulic mounting system (see section 5.12)
32. Control unit for interlocking the differential, FDA and mode of RLM damping ( see sections
5.3; 5.4 and 5.7)
33. Control lever of the hydraulic system distributor
34. Seat
35. Lever for shifting PTO modes ( independent drive/neutral)
36. Parking brake lever
MTZ 2022/2022V Section 4.Controls
Starter and controls switch (2)

It has four positions:
0 – switched on
I – instruments, control lamps, a radio set, a
tape recorder are switched on
II - sparking plugs are switched on (position

is not fixed) with this, in the block of control
lamps ( with diesel cold) start up control lamp
lights, and in the oil pressure indicator -–a
control lamp of emergency pressure lights and
sound signal sounds (buzzer);
III – starter is switched on (position is not

fixed), after diesel start up control lamp goes
down and sound alarm switches off
MULTIFUNCTIONAL (UNDER STEERING

WHEEL) SWITCH (3)
PUSHBUTTON (4) OF REMOTE SB
It allows to switch turn lights, change front SWITCH
headlights’ high/lower beam, high beam
signal, sound alarm. When pushing the button, batteries are
activated, repeated pushing switches them off.
TURN INDICATORS are switched by moving
lever from the middle position forward or
back. After tractor’s turn the lever is
automatically reset.
SOUND ALARM is activated by pressing the

lever in axial direction. Signal is switched on
in any position of the switch.
CHANGING HIGH/LOWER BEAM OF

HEADLIGHTS ( after pushing button (22) in
position <3>, page 36, is effected by moving
lever up/down along the steering column axis:
high beam – lower fixed position; lower beam
– middle fixed position; high beam blinking –
by moving upwards to the end from the
middle position ( non-fixed position).
SWITCH* OF FRONT OPERATION

HEADLIGHTS (1).
When pressing switch key (1), front operation

headlights, installed on cabin handrail are _____________________________________
switched on. Simultaneously light key *) The switch of road illumination headlights
indicator is on. installed on cabin handrail is optional.
Combination of instruments
It includes six indicators ( 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 )
with signal lamps ( 6a, 7a, 8a, 9a, 10a)
GB oil pressure indicator (5)

The indicator scale has three zones:
- operation zone – from 800 to 800 kPa
(8…15 kgs/cm2);
- non-operation zone (two) – from 400 to
800 kPa (4…8 kgs/cm2) and from 1500 to
1800 kPa (15…18 kgs/cm2).
Indicator of air pressure in the pneumatic

system (6)
(5…8 kgs/cm 2);
- non-operation zones (two) – from 0 to 500
kPa (0-5 kgs/cm 2) and from 800 to 1000
kPa (8…10 kgs/cm 2).
The indicator scale has the built-in red color
signal lamp (6a), which lights when
pneumatic system pressure drops to below
500 kPa (5 kgs/cm 2).
Fuel level indicator (7) with reserve fuel

orange color signal lamp (7a). The scale has
the following divisions < 0-1/4 – ½, ¾, -1>.
Voltage indicator (8)

It displays SB voltage with non-operational
diesel, when starter switch key (2) is in
The voltage indicator scale has the following
position <I>. With diesel in operation, the
zones:
indicator displays generator terminals voltage.
Table 4-1
The voltage indicator scale has built-in red
Supply system state
color control lamp. It lights when additional
storage battery terminals’ voltage drops to Scale zone, color With diesel in With non-
operation operational
below allowable limit. diesel
10.0 –12.o V SB is charged Generator
IMPORTANT! If voltage indicator (8) red doesn’t function
shows absence of SB charging, check the
12.0-13.2 V SB is normally No SB charge
state and tension of the generator driving yellow charged (low charging
belt. voltage)
13.2 – 15.2 V Normal charging
Green mode
15.2 – 16.0 V SB recharging

red
White mark in the Normal, EMF
yellow zone of the SB is
12.7V
________________________________________________________________________________
Indicator of diesel cooling fluid
temperature (9) with excessive temperature
indicator (9a) (red color)
The instrument scale has three zones:
- operation zone – 80-100 °C;
- non-operation zones (two) – 40-80 °C and
100…120 °C
Indicator of oil pressure in the diesel

lubrication system (10) with a red color
control lamp of emergency pressure drop
(10a)
(1…5 kgz/cm2)
- non-operation zones (two) – from 0 to 100
kPa (0…1 kgs/cm2) and from 500 to 600
kPa (5…6 kgs/cm2)
A set of control lamps (11)
Control lamp of high beam (blue

Control lamp of tractor turn
color)
(green color)
Control lamp of trailer turn
Control lamp of interlocking rear axle
(green color)
differential (orange color)
Control lamp of parking brake
(red color)
Control lamp of sparking plugs (orange color)
Control lamp of oil pressure
Control lamp of diesel start up (red color)
critical drop in HTDS system
(red color)
Control lamp of maximum Control lamp of braking fluid level (red color)
clogging of air purification
filter (orange color)
Tachometer-speedometer (12)
Electrical tachometer-speedometer installed

on the instrument panels operates as follows:
 When tractor stops and after starter and
instruments switch is put in position < I
>, the display (7) indicates (5) total diesel
operating time in hours;
 Upon diesel start up the pointer indicator
(8) moves along the circular scale (1) to
indicate frequency of diesel crankshaft
rotation. Meantime, display (4) shows
PTO rotation frequency (rev/min). Scale
(3) – for PTO I, and scale (2) – for PTO
II. Electric signal of rotation frequency is
sent from the generator phase winding;
 During tractor travel display (7) indicates
movement speed (km/h), while indication
(5) disappears. The electric signal of
movement speed is sent from speed 1. Scale of diesel crankshaft rotation frequency,
sensors installed on the rear axle cover. rev/min.
2. Scale of PTO II rotation frequency –1000
Tachometer-speedometer (12) control rev/min.
panel (19) 3. Scale of PTO I rotation frequency – 540
rev/min.
The control panel is installed on the 4. Display of PTO rotation frequency.
instruments’ board and is used for 5. Indication of diesel operating time, hours.
programming tachometer-speedometer 6. Indication of tractor movement speed, km/h.
according to tractor MTZ models, radius of 7. Display of diesel operating time and tractor
rear wheels swing and diesel models. movement speed.
8. Pointer indicator of diesel crankshaft rotation
frequency.
Parameter Value
NOTICE! Tachometer-speedometer has

been programmed exactly for your tractor
model at the manufacturer. Re-
programming will be required only upon
changing of tires type. Do not re-program 1. Pushbutton for entering parametric code
the tachometer-speedometer, if not on the tachometer-speedometer display
required. (7).
2. Pushbutton for entering to the tachometer-
speedometer display (7) of coded
numbers’ values when programming
according to tractor models, radius of rear
wheels swing and diesel models.
A set of switches (16), ( fan, heater, operation

headlights, front and rear,
rear windshield wiper, road train headlights).
Switch of cabin heater fan has three

positions:
1. Switched on:
2. The 1st operation mode is switched on
(small air supply).
3. The 2nd operation mode is switched on
(large air supply).
Switches of front operation headlights

When pushing the key front operation
headlights and key light indicator are on.
Switches of rear operation headlights

When pushing the keys rear operation
headlights and keys’ light indicators are on.
Switch of rear windshield wiper has three

positions:
1. Switched off
2. Windshield wiper is switched on
3. Windshield wiper and washer (not fixed)
are switched on.
Switch of “road train” sign lights
When pushing the key road train signal lamps

and key light indicator are switched on.
Fuses
Fuse box is installed under cover “A”.
Five fuses protect from overload the following
electric circuits:
1. Cabin ceiling light and “road train” sign (7.5
A)
2. Rear windshield wiper and washer (7.5A)
3. Two pairs of front operation headlights (25
4. Two pairs of rear operation headlights (25 A)
5. Cabin ventilation and heating system (15 A)
6. Reserve (15 A)
Cabin door lock (17)

Handle (A) is designed for opening the cabin
door: pull the handle back to open the door . Push
handle (B) back to interlock the door from
possible opening from outside.
Multifunctional switch, the right-hand (20)

provides:
 switching on two-speed electric front
windshield wiper;
 switching on front windshield washer.
To switch on the windshield wiper shift the

switch handle from position “switched off” (the
end front position “0”) to position “I” back (1st
speed), or “II” (2nd speed). All positions are fixed.
To switch on the windshield washer (not fixed)
shift the handle up from any of the three switch
positions.
Switch of light emergency alarm (21)

:
Press button (21) to switch on light
emergency alarm. The control lamp built-n
the button is blinking as light alarm blinks.
Central light switch (22)

It has three positions:
1. Switched off. The right button part is
OFF
pressed.
2. Front and rear side lights are switched on,
instruments illumination, license plate
illumination, trailing machine side lights,
auxiliary trailing machine headlights,
information display and processing panel.
Middle position.
3. All systems from position “2” and front
road headlights are switched on.
Left button side is pressed.
Fuse boxes
Two electric circuits’ fuse boxes BP-1 and
BP-2 are installed under the instruments
panel.
To get access to fuses unscrew screw (A) and
remove cover (B).
Eleven fuses protect the following electric
circuits from overload:
FB – 1
1. Instruments’ power supply (7.5 A);
2. Interrupter of turn indicators (7.5 A);
3. Lower light of the right-hand road
headlight (7.5 A);
4. Lower light of the left-hand road
headlight (7.5 A );
5. Right-hand side lights and instruments
panel illumination (15 A);
6. Left-hand side lights (7.5 );
FB-2
1. High light of road headlights (15 A);

2. Sound signal (15 A);
3. Sparking plugs of the pre-start heating;
4. Emergency light alarm(15 A);
5. Front windshield wiper and washer (15
A);
6. Stop light (15 A);
Safety system unit for control of FDA, DL,

RLM and GB reduction gear
Fuses (7.5 A) protect the following circuits:
1. Front drive axle;
2. Rear axle DL;
3. Reserve;
4. Suppression of RLM damping;
5. Control of GB reduction gear;
6. Reserve.
CAUTION! To avoid tractor wiring

burning, never use fuses with strength of
current over the rated values given below. If
a fuse blows too often, find out the reason
and correct it.
Connecting elements of electrical

equipment
Combined multifunctional socket is intended
for connecting current consuming elements of
a trailer or hitched agricultural implement, as
well as a portable lamp. It is mounted outside
to the rear cabin wall. The socket is connected
to wiring bundle plug of machines being
hitched and portable lamp plug.
Socket terminals’ markings:
1. Stop light;
2. Left-hand turn indicator;
3. Left-hand side lamp;
4. Sound alarm device;
5. “Ground”;
6. Right-hand turn indicator;
7. Right-hand side lamp;
8. Socket for connecting portable lamp.
Gears shifting lever (27)

Shifting diagram is shown in the figure to the
right (diagram I)
Button (27a) switches lower GB reduction
gear step (L).
Button (27b) switches higher GB reduction
gear step (H).
Range shifting lever (28)

Shifting diagram is shown in the figure to the
right (diagram II).
Fuel supply control lever (29)
Push the lever forward to increase fuel

supply, and visa versa.
PTO control lever (30)

It has three positions:
 smooth lever movement from position <
N > (neutral) down to the end switches
PTO on ( position “Ф” (friction clutch);
 to switch PTO off, move the lever from
the end front position to position “N”
(neutral);
 to brake PTO end (position “T” (brake),
move the lever up to the end.
HLS control unit (31)

(see section 5.12)
Control unit for rear axle DL and FDA

(32)
 sound alarm button (32a);
 key for FDA drive control (32b);
 light of FDA switched on state (32c);
 key for control of rear axle DL (32d);
 light of rear axle DL switched on state
(32e);
 key for switching on “damping” of
hinging mechanism swing (32f).
Levers for control of hydraulic system

distributor (33a, 33b, 33c)
Control levers are located on the cabin right-

hand side panel. They have the following
positions: “neutral”, “lowering”, “floating”,
and “lifting”.
Lever (33a) controls left-hand tractor
distributor section along the motion direction,
and left-hand rear outlets of the hydraulic
system.
It is fixed in positions “floating” and
“neutral”. Lever (33b) controls the middle
distributor section and middle rear outlets of
the hydraulic system. It is fixed in “floating”
and “neutral” positions.
Lever (33b) controls right-hand distributor’s
section and right-hand real outlets of the
hydraulic system. It is fixed in all positions.
Seat (34)
It can be adjusted according to:
 Weight of an operator. To adjust for
greater weight, rotate the lever clockwise,
and visa versa.
 Longitudinal adjustment. Move the lever
upwards to the end and move the seat - adjustment of back tilt angle
- place for safety belt attachment
forward or backwards.
- longitudinal adjustment
 Back tilt. Move the back tilt adjustment
lever upwards to the end, then lower and - operator’s weight adjustment
fix the back in the required position.
 Height adjustment. Move the seat
upwards by hands (to increase the seat
height). To decrease the seat height,
sharply jerk the seat up to the end and
then lower it by pushing downwards (after
pushing the seat drops to the lowest
position all by itself).
Handle (35) for switching on the

independent PTO drive
The handle (35) has two positions:
 “Independent PTO drive is switched on” -
the end lower position;
 “Switched off” (neutral) – the end top
position.
Parking brake control lever (36)

 “Parking brake engaged” - top end
position,
 “Parking brake disengaged” - end low
position.
Switch for changing velocity of PTO

independent drive (35a)
The independent drive switching lever (35a)
has two positions:
I – 590 and 1105 rev/min – the end, anti
clockwise;
II - 720 and 1460 rev/min – the end,
clockwise.
To set the required velocity of PTO rotation,

loosen bolt (1), turn the lever and tighten the
bolt.
Steering wheel (18)

1. Position of the steering wheel can be
adjusted by height within 100 mm.
To make adjustment do the following:
 take the cover off (2);
 unscrew fastener (1) by 3…5 turns;
 move steering wheel (18) back or forward,
choosing the position most comfortable
for operation;
 screw the fastener up and put the cover in
place.
2. Tilt of the steering column can be changed

stepwise in the range of 25°– 40°with 5° space.
To change the steering column tilt pull back
handle (23) (see page 29), tilt the column and
steering wheel to the required position,
release the lever and slightly lower the
column to the fixed position.
Lever for switching GB pump (37)

It has two positions:
 “pump switched on” - lever (37) is turned
anti clockwise before being fixed and
locked with bolt (A);
 non-operational position – lever (37) is
turned clockwise before being fixed.
Operational lever position – “pump switched
on” (bolt (A) is tightened).
NOTE. If cover (B) needs to be dismantled,
lever (37) must be put to non-operational
position. Upon drive setting turn the lever to
position “pump switched on” again and fix it
with bolt (A).
Handle for switching off compressor drive

(38)
 “compressor switched on” - when lever
OFF
(38) is set with an arrow to the right
(towards the cabin);
 “compressor switched off” - when the
lever is set with an arrow to the left. ON
Switch on the compressor with non-

operational diesel or at minimum revolutions
of the idle run.
Roller for switching on HLS pump (39)

 “pump switched on” - the roller is turned
clockwise to the end;
 “pump switched off” - the roller is turned
anti clockwise to the end.
Before turning roller (39) to any of the two

positions, loosen bolt (41) by 1.5…2 turns
and turn roller (39) together with lock plate
(40)
Tighten bolt (41).
External HLS control panels (left and right

hand) (42)
When pressing upper button (P), RLM is
lifted, when pressing button (0) – lowers.
CAUTION! When using external

controls, don’t stand between the tractor
and machine (implement) being mounted
to avoid injures.
4.1. REVERSIBLE CONTROL POST

(MTZ 2022V)
To improve possibilities of ganging up

tractors to front mounted agricultural
machines they are equipped with a reversible
control post.
Elements of reverse control:
 auxiliary steering column with a meter
pump;
 duplicated pedal drives for control of
friction clutch, brakes, fuel supply;
 seat reversing mechanism;
 auxiliary sound alarm button and light of
emergency modes of diesel operation.
NOTICE!
1. Tractor’s reversible control post is
designed only for agricultural
operations when moving in reverse
direction.
2. Be sure to interlock forward motion
brake pedals when working in the
reverse order.
3. Do not drive in reverse on public
roads, in operations not related
agriculture, or loading/unloading
the tractor itself.
4.1.1 Reversible post controls
Additional controls are placed in the rear

cabin section, as shown in the figure to the
right.
1. Clutch pedal. Press the pedal to disengage
the clutch, release it to engage it.
2. Brakes pedal. Press the pedal to engage
both brakes of the tractor and pneumatic
drive of trailer brakes.
3. Pedal of fuel supply control. Press the
pedal to increase fuel supply.
4. Sound alarm button.
5. Lever of fuel supply control. The end rear
position (on the reverse post) corresponds
to maximum fuel supply, the middle end –
diesel shut down.
6. GB range shifting lever. ( see shifting
diagram II) 1- clutch pedal; 2- steering wheel; 3- brakes
7. GB gear shifting lever (see shifting pedal; 4- fuel supply control pedal; 5-
diagram II). sound alarm button; 6 – fuel supply lever;
8. Forward motion steering column. 7- GB range shifting lever; 8 – gear
shifting lever; 9 – forward motion steering
Do the following operations to work in wheel.
reverse:
 interlock forward motion braking pedals;
 reinstall the steering wheel on the
auxiliary column. To this end, unscrew
the hand wheel fixing the steering wheel,
reinstall the steering wheel and fix it at the
required height.
 Install the reversible seat for operation in
the reverse.
 Fulfill operations from Section 5.2 to
transfer clutch control in the reverse
mode.
“L” – button of switching lower step of GB

reduction gear;
“H” – button of switching higher step of GB
reduction gear.
Observe the following sequence of operations

to adjust the seat for the work in reverse: In the reverse mode
 Lower clamps (1) and push them aside to
Forward motion
release cheek-pieces (3) of the upper
lifting mechanism frame;
 Applying effort upwards and downwards,
bring the seat to the utmost position;
 Pull handle (4) to release turning
mechanism and turn the seat by 180°;
 Insert clamps in-between cheek-pieces
and tighten them to the end.
Follow reverse order to put the seat in the
forward motion position.
Seat adjustments are independent and can be
performed while on the move.
Use handle (7) to make adjustments according
to operator’s weight. By turning the handle
clockwise, the seat is set for larger weight,
while turning it anti clockwise – for smaller
one.
Longitudinal adjustment is effected by lever
(6), which should be pushed to the end right
side to shift the seat forward or back.
To increase the seat height pull it manually
upwards in a stepwise manner.
To reduce the seat height sharply jerk the seat
upwards to the end, and then lower it by
pushing downwards.
Seat back tilt angle is adjusted by lever (5).
To change the back tilt, pull lever (5) up to
the end, set required tilt and< having lowered 1, 2 – clamp; 3 - cheek-pieces, 4-turning
the lever, fix it in the required position. lever,5. adjustment of back tilt angle; 6 –
Besides the seat described above, the tractor longitudinal adjustment; 7- weight
may be equipped with another seat MTZ (see adjustment.
page 39 for adjustment).
4.2. PROGRAMMING OF TACHOMETER-

SPEEDOMETER (12)
To program tachometer-speedometer use
control panel (19) and do the following:
- take cover (4) off panel (19);
- press button (I) to enter programming
mode;
1. program tachometer-speedometer
according to the number of pinion teeth
where diesel revolutions sensor is
installed (parameter “I”); to this end:
- press button (I) and enter figure “I” on
display (7) of tachometer-speedometer
(12);
- press button (2) and set the value of the
number of teeth (Z) according to the Parameter Value
below given table:
Table 4.2
N of
teeth (Z) Tractor model
69 MTZ 570; 590; 80; 1; 890;
900; 922; 950; 1025 and
modifications thereof
23 MTZ 1021, 1221; 1222; 2022
2. Program radius of rear wheel rolling Program the diesel model (parameter <3>);
(parameter “2”): - Press button (1) and enter figure <3>on
- press button (1) and enter figure “2” on display (7) of the tachometer-
display (7); speedometer;
- press button (2) and enter value Rk - Press button (2) and enter the required
according to table below. diesel model
NOTE: If data on the type of tires assembled Seven seconds after programming is over the
is not available, before putting the tractor in device automatically is set in the operation
operation one can measure Rk as distance mode. Put the panel cover in place.
from wheel axle to support surface. Then
enter on display coded number, closest to
value measured.
MTZ 2022/2022V - Operation manual. Section 5. Design and operation
5. DESIGN AND OPERATION OF THE TRACTOR COMPONENTS

The front shaft end bears: pinion for driving
5.1. DIESEL ENGINE gas distribution mechanism, oil pump drive
The tractor is equipped with a six-cylinder, pinion, water pump, generator and air
in-line, four-stroke diesel D-260.4*, with conditioning generator (if available) drive
turbo-supercharging, intermediate pulley.
supercharged air cooling, direct fuel injection, To reduce the level of crankshaft torsion
fluid cooling. vibrations, the pulley is provided with fluid
The diesel is started with an electrical starter. torsion vibration damper (3).
Diesel (pp. 47, 48) consists of a cylinder Piston is made of aluminum alloy. The piston
block, two cylinder heads, crank mechanism, bottom has combustion chamber. The upper
gas distribution mechanism, and also fuel and section thereof is provided with two
air supply, lubrication, cooling, starting, compression and one oil-control rings with an
electrical equipment systems. expander. The upper compression ring is
Cylinder block (20) has a mono-block design trapezoid-shaped and has barrel-like profile
and looks like a rigid cast iron casting. coated with chrome; the second compression
ring is of the “minute” type. To accommodate
The boring block has six removable cylinder
the upper ring the piston is provided with
sleeves (15) made of special-grade cast iron.
“niresistive” insert (see figure on page 49).
Sleeves are installed in the cylinder block
along two centered belts. In the upper belt the
sleeve is fixed with a clamp, and in the lower
one it is sealed with two rubber rings
From below the cylinder block is covered
with cast oil crank case (1) made of aluminum
alloy.
Two interchangeable cylinder heads (18)
(one for three cylinders) are iron cast.
Cylinder heads have insert valve seats made
of heat-resistant and wear-resistant alloy.
Cylinder heads are provided with injectors
(14), page 48, (three for each head).
To seal space between heads and cylinder
block, a filler piece (19) of asbestos-steel
cloth is placed (page 47). Openings for
cylinder sleeves and oil duct are backlined
with sheet steel. During diesel assembly at the
manufacturer’s filler piece cylinder openings
are additionally backlined with fluoroplastic
rings.
Crank mechanism includes crankshaft (25)
with main and crankpin bearings, flywheel
(22), pistons (14), including rings and pins,
connecting rods (13).
Crankshaft is a steel seven-bearing structure
with counter-balances. Connecting rod necks
are provided with cavities for additional *) The tractor may be equipped with diesel D-
centrifugal oil purification, covered with 260.4C
threaded plugs
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual Section 5. Design and operation

1 – oil crank case; 2 – oil mump; 3- torsion vibration damper; 4 – crankshaft pulley; 5 – fan drive
belt; 6 – cover of distribution pinions; 7 – stretcher pulley; 8 – generator drive belt; 9 – fan; 10 –
water pump; 11 – casing of thermostats; 12 – piston pin; 13 – connecting rod; 14 – piston; 15 –
cylinder sleeve; 16 – cover cup (2 pieces); 17 – cylinder head cover ( 2 pieces); 18 – cylinder head
(two pieces); 19 – cylinder head filler piece (one piece); 20 – cylinder block; 21 rear sheet; 22 –
flywheel; 23 – counter balance; 24 – cover; 25 0 crankshaft; 26 – piston cooling injector; 27- oil
receiver.

1 – distribution shaft; 2 – pusher; 3 – valve; 4 – guide bushing; 5 – rod; 6 – turbo compressor; 7 –
rocker; 8 – roller; 9 – valve plate; 10 – dentils; 11 – inside spring; 12 – outside spring; 13 – fixed
member; 14 – injector; 15 – fuel pump*; 16 – manual fuel supply pump; 17 – plug for air removal
from fuel pump head; 18 – sealing ring.
*) Presently, distribution-type fuel pumps shown above are replaced with in-line fuel pumps
“Yazda”, Russia, or “Motorpal”, Czech republic.

Connecting rod is a steel T-shape device. A
bushing is pressed in its upper head. Openings
are provided in the upper connecting rod and
sleeve section for piston pin lubrication. The
lower head consists of a lower connecting rod
section and a cover with a similar marking.
Connecting rods’ covers are not
interchangeable. Besides, connecting rods are
marked by upper and lower heads, put on the
end face of upper connecting rod head. One
group connecting rods should be installed on
the diesel.
Inserts of main and crankpin bearings of
the crankshaft are thin-walled and made of 1- piston; 2- “niresist”-type insert; 3- upper
bimetal strop. Inserts have two sizes of inside compression ring; 4 – the second
diameter according to the nominal size of compression ring; 5- oil-control ring with
crankshaft necks. an expander.
Flywheel is made of cast iron and is fastened
to the crankshaft flange with bolts. A steel Valves’ rockers (7) are made of steel and
toothed ring is compressed on the flywheel. sway on rollers installed in fixed members.
Mechanism of gas distribution consists of The rocker’s roller is shallow and has six
pinions, inlet and exhaust camshaft, as well as radial openings for lubrication of rockers. The
parts of installing and driving thereof. rockers motion along rollers is limited by
The camshaft is a four-bearing structure distance springs.
being rotated by the crankshaft via gear Inlet and exhaust valves (4) are made of
pinions. heat-resistive steel. They move in guide
Pushers (2), page 48, are made of steel and bushings compressed in cylinder heads. Each
have spherical bottoms. Camshaft cams have valve is closed by two springs: the outside
slight tilt that imparts rotational movement to (12) and inside (11), which are fastened to its
pushers. rod by way of a plate (9) and dentils (10)
Rods (5) of pushers are made of steel bar. Sealing rings (18) installed on valves’ guide
Spherical part coming inside the pusher and bushings exclude oil trapping in diesel
the rod cup are tempered. cylinders via spacing between valves’ rods
and guide bushings.

Diesel supply system consists of an air purifier, air intake pipeline, intake and exhaust manifolds,
turbo compressor, supercharged air cooler, muffler, fuel tanks,
fuel coarse and fine filters, fuel pump, injectors, high and low pressure fuel lines.
Supercharged air cooler
1 – booster pump; 2 – by-pass pipeline; 3 – fuel pump, 4- high pressure fuel lines; 5 – main filtering
element; 6 – control filtering element; 7 – air purifier; 9 – sleeve; 10 –turbo compressor; 11 – by-
pass; 12 – air purifier clogging light; 13 – exhaust pipe; 14 – muffler; 15 – injector; 16 – guard ring;
17 – fuel coarse filter; 18 – filler neck; 19 – fuel tank; 20 – fuel level float; 21 – coupler of sediment
drain; 22 – stop valve, 23 – drainage pipeline; 24 – pneumatic corrector pipeline; 25 – fuel fine
filter; 26 – sealing ring; 27 – bolt; 28 – air outlet plug; 29 – supercharged air cooler; 30 water
radiator ( for reference); 31 - input diesel manifold.
*) Diesels equipped with in-line fuel pumps have a fine filter with a paper filtering element in the
supply system.
MTZ 2022/2022V Operation manual ` Section 5. Design and operation

Donaldson Air purifier (G100317) is of dry
type and uses paper filter cartridges as
filtering element. It has three steps of dry
purification through the main and control
paper filtering elements and in-built mono
cycle/
The control lamp on the instruments’ panel
shows the degree of an air purifier clog up.
An electrical sensor of air purifier clogging up
operates at the manifold vacuum 459 +/-50
mm of water
Fuel coarse filter
Fuel is purified of mechanical impurities and

water by the coarse filter having meshed
filtering element (4). The filter sediment is
drained through the drain plug (1) in the
lower part of the barrel (3).
1 – plug; 2 – damper; 3 – barrel; 4 – meshed

reflector; 5 – scatterer; 6 try square; 7 – filter
body.

Fuel fine filter
It has two changeable filtering elements (0)
adopted to diesels D-243. Each filtering
element is installed in a separate knock-down
filter-cartridge
Fuel fine filter is intended for multi-use purposes
under condition filtering elements and rubber
spacers (15, 16) are periodically replaced, and
operation regulations are observed.
To outlet air from the supply system a plug
(3) is provided in the filter body.
1 – input duct; 2 – exhaust duct; 3 – air outlet

plug; 4 – filter body; 5 – coupling; 6 – inlet
opening; 7 – bottom; 8 – coupling; 9 – clamp;
10 – filtering element; 11 – fuel outlet duct;
12 – spring; 13 – cup; 14 – nut; 15,16 –
spacer; 17 – escape plug; 18 – plug; 19 –
body.
Fine fuel filter

is designed for diesel engines equipped with
in-line fuel pumps 363.11110005404
(YAZDA, Russia), or PP6M10PIF-3493
(Czech republic). It has one changeable
filtering element installed in the body (19).
Injectors (15) of closed type with five
openings atomizer (see figure on page 50)
inject fuel.
FUEL PUMP
High pressure fuel pump is of a distribution type*) and has two sections with fuel dosage by
means of supply end change, and a pneumatic anti-fume corrector. The fuel pump is driven by the
diesel crankshaft via gas distribution pinions.
1 - oil level plug; 2 – bushing; 3 – flange; 4 – cam shaft; 5 – main lever tie-bar; 6 – adjusting lever;
7 – metering drive bushing; 8 – bolt; 9 – start spring; 10 – cover; 11 – fuel supply coupling; 12 –
damper spring; 13 – damper body; 14 – damper piston; 15 – plunger bushing; 16 – high-pressure
couplings; 17 – spring; 18 – supercharging valve; 19 – technological plug; 20 – reverse valve; 21 –
plunger; 22 – meter; 23 – plug; 24 – tooth bushing; 25 –upper plate spring; 26 – upper governor
cover; 27 – governor shaft; 28 - <stop> screw; 29 – maximum revolutions screw; 30 – intermediate
pinion; 31 – lever bushing; 32 – control lever; 33 – governor spring shackle; 34 –main level
bearing; 35 – main lever; 36 – corrector cup; 37 – governor spring; 38 – limiter; 39 – check-nut; 40
–lever; 41 –corrector spring; 42 - check nut; 43 – corrector tie-rod; 44 – lever; 45 – check nut; 46 –
pneumatic corrector cover; ,47 – diaphragm; 48 – spring; 49 – pneumatic corrector tie-rod; 50 –
corrector body; 51 – check-nut; 52 – corrector lever; 53 – plate; 54 – bearing; 55 – corrector lever
axis; 56 – governor bushing; 57 – splint; 58 – driven pinion; 59 – supercharged pump drive shaft;
60 –governor damping spring; 61 – governor shaft adjusting washer; 62 drive pinion; 63 drive
pinion; 64 – pump body; 65 – plunger pusher; 66 – pusher roller axis; 67 – pusher spring; 68 –
lower spring plate; 69 – pusher roller.
The fuel pump is aggregated with an all-mode To remove air from the supply system, the
governor and a piston-type booster pump. manual, booster, piston –type pump (1) and a
The governor has a fuel supply corrector, an plug (see figure on page 50), as well as a plug
automatic fuel supply dresser, operating at (see figure on page 48) installed in the fuel
starting revolutions velocity, and connected to pump head.
the inlet diesel collector via an air conduct. To supply fuel use pedal (24) (see figure on
The booster pump is installed on the high page 27) or lever (29) (see figure on page 28).
pressure pump body and is actuated by the To stop the diesel with an in-line pump use
camshaft eccentric. lever (26a).
To lubricate the fuel pump parts use diesel
Turbo compressor lubrication.
The turbo compressor uses exhaust gases
\energy to charge air into diesel cylinders. It
consists of a centrifugal one-step compressor
(6) and a radial centripetal turbine (1).
The turbine wheel (1) is made of heat
resistant nickel alloy welded to the rotor shaft.
The compressor wheel (6) is aluminum alloy
cast, being fastened to the rotor shaft by a
special nut (7)
The turbo compressor principle of operation
is that exhaust gases outgoing under pressure
from cylinders, pass through the exhaust
collector to the gas turbine chamber and,
being expanded, rotate the turbine wheel, at
the other end of which is the compressor
1 – turbine wheel and shaft; 2 – turbine body;
wheel.
3 – bearing; 4 – oil deflector; 5 – sealing ring;
Gases go out through the exhaust pipe.
6 – compressor wheel; 7 – special nut; 8 –
The excessive air pressure behind the
bushing; 9 – diffuser; 10 – disk; 11 –
compressor at the rated diesel operation mode
compressor body; 12 – stop ring; 13 – fixing
should be 0.07…0.10 MPa (0.7…1.0
element; 14 – medium body; 15- bushing.
kgs/cm2).
________________________________________________________________________
SUPERCHARGED AIR COOLER

(see figure on page 50)
Supercharged air cooler (SAC) (29) is

connected to the turbo compressor (10) and
inlet diesel collector (31) by way of air
manifolds and hoses.
SAC is an air heat exchanger consisting of the
core in the form of aluminum pipes, tanks and
manifolds. It is installed in front of water
radiator and attached to radiator poles. Air is
conducted to the SAC from the turbo
compressor and cooled, improving diesel
power and economic characteristics, and then
comes to the diesel inlet collector
MTZ 2022/2028 - Operation manual Section 5. Design and operation
LUBRICATION SYSTEM is of a combined Oil pump (20) is of pinion, one-section

design; some parts are lubricated under pressure, design driven by the crankshaft. It gas a by-
others – by spraying. It consists of an oil pump pass valve being opened under pressure over
(20), oil filter (2) with paper filtering element, 0.7…0.74 MPa (7…7.5 kgs/cm2), by-passing
centrifugal oil filter (14), fluid-oil heat-exchanger oil from the charging cavity to the inlet suck
(3). Lubrication system diagram is shown below.
cavity.
1- by-pass valve; 2 – paper oil filter; 3 – heat exchanger; 4 – main oil duct; 5 - emergency oil
pressure sensor; 6 – pressure gauge; 7 - turbo compressor; 8 – fuel pump; 9 – pneumatic
compressor; 10 – intermediate pinion; 11 – oil duct of rocker axle; 12 – distribution shaft; 13 –
crankshaft; 14 – centrifugal oil filter; 15 – piston; 16 – piston cooling nozzle; 17 – oil
crankcase; 18 – drain plug; 19 – oil drain; 20 – oil pump;21 safety valve.
The oil pump intakes oil via oil pick-up (19) element. The valve is not adjustable. Besides,
from oil crankcase (17) and through ducts of the filter has a safety valve (21) adjusted to
the cylinder block supplies to the full flow oil sustaining pressure in the lubrication system
filter (2) with a paper filter element, an part of at 0.28…0.45 MPa (2.8…4.5 kgs/cm 2)
oil – to centrifugal oil filter (14) for
purification and subsequent drain in the
crankcase.
The filtering element of the oil filter has a
by-pass valve (1) which, with excessive
clogging of the filtering element, or when
starting cold diesel, is opened and supplies oil
to the oil dust by-passing the filtering
During diesel operation oil, purified in the filter and cooled in the fluid-oil heat exchanger (3), via
cylinder block ducts is supplied to all bearings of the crankshaft and the distribution shaft. Via
nozzles (16) built-in main support of the cylinder block, oil is supplied to cool pistons (15).
Oil is supplied for lubrication of turbo compressor (7) and tractor’s pneumatic system from heat
exchanger (3) via individual ducts.
The cooling system *) of the diesel is of fluid closed type with forced circulation of cooling fluid.
It consists of the water jacket, a water pump, a radiator, a fan with an automatically controlled
viscosity pipe coupling, two thermostats, expansion tank with a radiator plug having steam air
valve, connecting rods and drain valves. The water pump with a viscosity friction coupling is shown
on the next page. The expansion tank is provided with a measuring glass to control coolant level.
1 - a diesel fastening arm; 2 – water pump manifold;3 - shock absorber of water radiator rubber
suspension; 4 – water pump drive belt; 5 – lower radiator tank; 6 – radiator water drain valve; 7 –
water pump belt tensioning roller; 8 – automatic tension spring; 9 – automatically switched fan with
a coupling; 10 – water radiator core; 11 – stopper of the forced fan switching mechanism; 12 –
upper radiator tank; 13 – water radiator fill-in neck cover; 14 – steam air pipe; 15 – expansion tank;
16 – cooling fluid temperature sensor; 17 – emergency sensor of cooling liquid temperature; 18 –
indicator of diesel cooling fluid temperature (including emergency temperature signal lamp); 19 –
water pump impeller; 20 – water jacket cavity of the cylinder block; 21 – water intake pipe; 22 –
ducts for directing flows of cooling fluid system; 23 – eye-bolt; 24 – plug; 25 – valve to drain fluid
from cylinder block ( installed on the opposite side of the diesel); 26 – fluid-oil heat exchanger.
*) deaeration and compensation loop type.

Thermal state is adjusted by changing the

amount of air passing through the cooling
system radiator, and also by two thermostats.
The cooling liquid temperature is controlled
using the remote thermometer, sound and
light signal instruments, sensors of which are
located in the thermostats’ body cover. The
rated diesel temperature mode corresponds to
cooling liquid temperature of 80…97 °C.
The fluid-oil heat exchanger built-in diesel
body cools diesel lubrication oil. To control
oil pressure, the heat exchanger exhaust
flange is provided with operation and
emergency pressure sensors. The rated diesel
temperature mode in what concerns
lubrication oil is 80…120 °C.
Radiator is of pipe and plate design and is
provided with an in-fill neck with no steam 1 – fan blade; 2 – driven cover; 3 – stoppage
air valve. opening; 4 – stopper nut; 5 – stopper; 6 – end;
The fan has two operational modes: 7 – return spring; 8 –yoke – 9 pusher; 10
 automatic; valve 11- drive valve; 12 – coupling; 13 –
 forced. driven disk; 14 – drive shaft; 15 – water pump
The automatic mode is ensured by the pulley; 16 – water pump; 17 - rod
viscosity friction coupling in the following
way: at cooling fluid temperature below 80 °C
, the return spring (7) keeps valve (10) closed, When cooling liquid temperature exceeds 80 0
and viscous fluid overflows to the reserve C, the thermal sensitive element by means of
coupling cavity, dive (11) and driven disks rod (17) and pusher (9), overcoming return
(13) rotate with space in-between, providing spring (7) opens valve (10). Viscous fluid
minimum fan rotation. In this case fan overflows to the operation cavity via drive
rotation should not exceed 1500 rev/min. disc opening, and fills the space between dive
and driven disks, resulting in these disks
coupling, thus switching the fan in the
operation mode.
CAUTION! Switch on forced fan

operation mode when the pneumatic
system compressor is operational.
MTZ 2022/2022V - Operation manual Section 5. Design and operation
Do the following to change for the forced needed, press stopper (5) with a hand to stop
(permanent) fan operation mode: drive and driven discs.
 unscrew nut (4) of stopper (5) by 4…5 Electrical equipment and starting system
turns (about 5 mm); The diesel is equipped with 1250 W and 14 V
 manually rotate the fan until stopper generator.
enters opening (3) of drive disc (11). If
1 – lead of the additional storage battery charge; 2 – terminal “+14 V”; 3 – terminal “D” (lead of
excitation winding end); 4 – lead of the excitation winding start; 5 – terminal “+28V”; 6 – rectifier
block; 7 – rotor; 8 – stator; 9 – stator coil; 10 – excitation coil; 11 – generator tightening bolt; 12 –
generator coil cup; 13 – generator front cover; 14 – fan; 15 – pulley; 16 – one-time grease closed
type ball bearings; 17 – rotor bushing; 18 – 14 V integral voltage regulator; 19 – terminal “W”; 20 –
28 V integral voltage regulator; 21 – cover of the regulation device.
Generator is of brushless inductive design, alternating current with two levels of voltage regulation
(14 and 28 V) with built-in power and auxiliary rectifiers and electronic voltage regulators. The
generator is intended for operation within an electric equipment system and diesel start at rated
voltage of 24 V and vehicle-borne voltage of 12 V.
The first voltage level (terminals “+14 V”, “D”; “W” (“-”) is used for the vehicle-borne supply line,
the second voltage level (terminal + 28 V) is used for additional storage battery charging.
The generator can operate both in an independent excitation mode (with a storage battery), and in
the self-excitation mode (without storage battery). The generator is driven by the wedge belt from
the crankshaft pulley.
The diesel starting device consists of an electric starter 20.3708 with voltage of 23 V and power
5.9 kW.
The starter is a direct current electric motor of series excitation. It is remotely switched on by way
of an electric- magnetic relay and a starter switch.
1 – yoke; 2 - half-ring; 3 – starter cover; 4 – starter switching lever; 5 – switching lever axle; 6 – the
core of the traction relay and a shackle 7 – traction relay; 8 – contact disc with a rod; 9 – contact
bolts; 10 – rear starter cover; 11 – a spring; 12 – a brush; 13 – a collector; 14 - safety housing; 15 –
starter body; 16 – starter armature; 17 – a spring; 18 – coupling of free drive movement; 19 –
driving pinion; 20 armature shaft; 21 – bushing.
To start the diesel at low ambient temperature incandescent bulbs are used that heat pre-start air
inletting diesel cylinders.
Compressor
To drive trailer’s pneumatic brakes and tires
inflation the diesel is equipped with a piston,
one-cylinder, one step compressor. During
tractor’s operation in agricultural works, not
requiring compressed air power, the
compressor should be switched off. Segments
The compressor is installed on the distributor

cover flange and is driven by the fuel pump
driving pinion. The compressor is cooled by Expanders
air. When the compressor is in operation, the
fan should be switched to the forced mode.
The compressor has capacity of 180 l/min at
back pressure of 0.6 MPa (6 kgs/cm2) and
rated diesel rotation frequency.
NOTE: When the compressor is in

operation, the diesel fan should be switched
to the forced mode.
1 – roller bearing cut; 2 – intermediate

compressor driving pinion; 3 – compressor
switching shaft with an eccentrically located
pin; 4 – compressor switching lever; 5 – shaft
fixing arm; 6 – spring; 7 – fixing arm bolt; 8 –
crankcase; 9 – crankshaft and a driving
pinion; 10 – connecting rod; 11 – piston pin;
12 – plate; 13 – forced drought valve; 14 –
limiter; 15 – cylinder head; 16 – inlet valve;
17 – piston; 18 - compression rings; 19 –
segments, expanders ( oil-control ring); 20 –
cylinder; 21 – sealer; 22 – spring.
5.1.1. Possible diesel failures and methods of removal thereof
Failure, appearance Correction method
Diesel doesn’t start

Air in the fuel system Pump the system with fuel manual pipe.
Remove air ingress in the fuel system.
Fuel pump failure Remove the fuel pump from the diesel and
take it for repair
Fuel filters are clogged Rinse coarse fuel filter and replace filtering
` elements of fine fuel filter.
Diesel doesn’t develop capacity
Fuel pump control lever doesn’t come Adjust fuel pump control bars
to the end
The filtering element of the fine fuel Replace the filtering element of the fine fuel
filter is clogged. filter
Injectors failed. Find out failed injectors, rinse and adjust.
Injection advance angle is not properly Set the required angle of injection advance.
adjusted
Diesel smokes in all operation modes
A. Black fumes get out the exhaust pipe
Diesel air purifier is clogged. Carry out air purifier maintenance.
Injector nozzle needle floats. Find out failed injector, rinse or replace the
nozzle, adjust the injector.
Fuel pump is failed. Take off the fuel pump and take it for repair to
the workshop.
B. White fumes get out the exhaust pipe
The diesel is overcooled Heat up the diesel, during operation keep

cooling fluid temperature within 70 –95 °C
Water entrapped in fuel. Replace fuel.
No space between valves and rockers Adjust space between valves and rockers.
Angle of injection advance is not Set the recommended angle of injection

properly adjusted. advance
Continuation of table 5-1

C. Blue fumes get out the exhaust pipe
* Oil entrapped in the combustion chamber Replace worn out parts of the piston group.
due to wear of piston group parts.
* Excessive oil in the diesel crankcase Drain out excessive oil having set the level
according to the upper mark of the oil metering
rod.
Diesel overheats
* Insufficient amount of cooling liquid in Fill in the cooling liquid to the normal level.
the system
* The radiator is dirty outside. Clean the radiator.
* Dirt and scale in the cooling system. Clean and rinse the cooling system off dirt
and scale.
* The thermostat valve doesn’t open Replace one or two thermostats

completely
* The fan belt is not tight enough:

* The tightening device spring is broken; Replace the spring. If that is not possible,
temporarily interlock the tightening device,
having tightened generator bar and tightening
pulley with a bolt an a nut. But first, tighten the
belt.
* Jamming of the tightening pulley at the Dismantle the tightening device and correct the
lever axle. failure
* Oiling of the fan and pulley’s belt. Remove the driving belt, and clean oil traces
from belt and pulley’ surface.
Underrated oil pressure of the heated diesel
* oil indicator or sensor are failed. Replace the oil pressure indicator or sensor
after gauging oil pressure with a reference
gauge.
*Oil conducts sealing is no good. Find out the sealing problem and correct it.
* Oil pump is failed. Find out the problem and correct it.
* Oil level in the diesel crankcase Fill –in oil to the upper mark of the oil
is lower than rated value measuring rod
* Jamming of the safety valve in the Rinse the valve and adjust pressure in the
oil filter body lubrication system.
* Excessive wear of the coupling Correct the trouble.

“crankshaft necks – bearings”.

Malfunction, appearance Correction method
Turbo compressor
* Rotor of the turbo compressor doesn’t
rotate (no typical high-tone sound):
* Foreign matter hinder rotor rotation Take off inlet and exhaust manifolds, remove
foreign matter.
* Rotor is jammed in the bearing. Replace turbo compressor.
* Increased oil injection on the side of Take the turbo compressor off the diesel
the compressor or turbine, leaks from and send for repair.
oil sealing of the turbo compressor.
Starter
* During starter switching diesel crankshaft
doesn’t rotate (or rotates very slowly):
* storage battery clamps are not properly Strip lugs and tighten clamps.
tightened, or wiring lugs are oxidized
* storage battery discharged lower
allowable limit Charge or replace the battery.
* collector and brushes are dirty; Clean collector and brushes.
*brushes have poor contact with collector; Take the starter off the diesel, scrape the
collector, or replace brushes if worn out.
*burnt starter relay contacts; Scrape starter relay contacts.
*starter driving coupling slips (worn out
coupling rollers, or yoke cracked); Replace starter drive.
* After diesel start, the starter remains switched on:
* the power disc is stuck to contact bolts
of starter relay; Stop the diesel, switch off the battery and
clean contacts of the traction relay.
* driving pinion stays engaged to the Replace the return spring of the push lever.
flywheel ring due to break of push
lever spring.

Generator
* Voltage indicator doesn’t show charging

after diesel start and further on during
operation:
*positive clamp torn off, or short-circuited
on the generator body; Disconnect the rectifier, weld and insulate
*excitation coil open-circuit damaged site, and if the trouble is not
corrected, replace the excitation coil.
*short -circuit in straight and opposite
rectifiers’ polarity of one phase; Replace the rectifier.
*short-circuiting of one of stators phases

on generator body; Replace the starter.
*generator doesn’t develop full capacity:
* torn off wiring leading to the regulator; Solder and insulate the damaged site.
* one of stator’s phases torn off; Replace the stator.
* turn short-circuiting of the stator winding; Replace the stator.
* turn short-circuiting of the excitation coil Replace the excitation coil.
winding.
* Generator noise:
* driving belt slips or is too tight; Adjust driving belt tension.
* ball bearings are worn out; Replace ball bearings.

Failure, appearance Correction methods
The units of the automatic fan clutch control system
* If water temperature exceeds 97 °C at the *remove fan clutch;

diesel outlet, the cooling system fan doesn’t *press the rod in the water pump to the end,
switch on , or with water temperature below and measure how far it extends;
70 °C, the cooling system fan doesn’t *start the diesel and heat it to bring water
switch off: temperature at the outlet to 80-85 °C;
 fault with thermal power sensor, or a fan stop the diesel and measure rod extension
clutch. from the water pump;
1. If extension didn’t increase against the
initial, replace thermal power sensor;
2. If extension increased by 6-8 mm, replace
fan clutch, and send faulty clutch for repair. I f
the clutch can’t be replaced, interlock it by the
given above method (see “ The diesel cooling
system”).
Tachometer-speedometer
*During tractor travel the tachometer-
speedometer shows constant speed of 0.2
km/h:
*One of speed sensors failed. Replace sensor
*During diesel operation tachometer
doesn’t indicate rev/min:
*open-circuit from phase winding to Correct the trouble.
tachometer – speedometer;
*no signal from generator phase winding. Replace the generator.
5.2. THE CLUTCH The grease cup is on the left side of the clutch
body. To get access unscrew the plug.
Diesel flywheel (1) is provided with dry, two-
disc clutch of permanently closed type.
The driving elements of the clutch are
flywheel (1), pressure clutch plate (3) and
middle plate
(2) with three pins on the outside surface,
coming in special flywheel grooves (1),
driven clutch elements are two driven discs
(24) provided with torsion vibration damper
(90) installed on the power shaft (7). Required
pressure effort of friction surfaces of driving
and driven coupling parts are provided by
nine outside and nine inside springs (22). An
elastic element is installed between floating
bushing (8) connected to the driving shaft (9),
and support plate (12).
The middle disc (2) has lever mechanisms
(11) that ensure disc (2) equal distance setting
between flywheel friction surface (1) and
pressure clutch plate (3). Yokes (13) serve as 1. – flywheel; 2 – middle disc; 3 – pressure
squeeze clutch levers supports. clutch plate; 4 – driving shaft; 5 – bushing; 6
They are fixed on the support disc by way of – bearing; 7 – power shaft; 8 – floating
adjusting nuts and fixing washers (14). bushing; 9 – torsion vibration damper; 10 –
Clutch is engaged and disengaged by shifter squeeze lever; 11 – lever mechanism; 12 –
(17) and squeezing bearing (16) moving along support disc; 13 – yoke; 14 – washer; 15 –
bar (18). Shifter yoke (19) with roller (20) are nut; 16 – bearing; 17 – shifter; 18 – shifter
connected to clutch pedal via hydraulic static bar; 19 – switch off yoke; 20 – control roller;
drive. 21 – cup; 22 pressure clutch springs; 23
Squeeze bearing (16) is lubricated by means insulating washer, 24 – driven discs.
of the press-grease cup screwed in the shifting
neck.
5.2.1. CLUTCH BODY
Clutch body (30) contains drive and driven 27) in clutch and GB bodies. The shaft of
shafts with pinions, oil pump drives of HLS needle bearings bears (25) driven pinions (19,
and 24) of
transmission hydraulic system. Drive shaft (4) two-speed independent PTO drive. Fixed
is mounted on two bearing supports. The pinions (19, 24) are connected with the shaft
shaft has a toothed ring and splints with by
installed pinion (5) forcing pinion (19) of the way of toothed clutch (23) being moved by
independent PTO (18) of driving the driven means of yoke (20) and roller (21).
shaft to rotate, and pinion (8) that drives oil HLS oil pump is driven by means of pinions
pumps. Power shaft (1) passes through shaft (5) and (8), and transmission hydraulic system
(4) which via splint pushing (6) transmits pump – by pinions (5), (8) and shafts (15),
torsion (12).
moment from the clutch to GB input shaft.
Driven shaft (18) is mounted on two bearings
(17,
1 – power shaft; 2 – bar; 3 – 3, 10, 14, 17, 25, 27 – bearings; 4 – drive shaft; 5 – pinion; 6 - splint
bushing; 7 – cover; 8 – pumps drive pinion; 9 , 15 – shaft-pinion; 11 – nut; 12 – shaft-pinion; 13 –
shaft – 16 – sealing ring; 18 – driven shaft; 19 – pinion; 20 – yoke; 21 – roller; 22 – cover; 23 –
toothed clutch; 24 – pinion; 26 – cup; 28 – roller; 29 – yoke; 30 – body.

CLUTCH DRIVE
The clutch drive is intended for clutch control

both for forward travel and driving in reverse.
The clutch drive is of hydraulic static design
with suspended pedals and a hydraulic
booster.
The drive consists of main cylinders (1) ( for
forward travel), and 19 – (for driving in
reverse), suspended pedals 10 (forward travel)
and 12 ( driving in reverse), valve 21 ( for
automatic
changing tractor forward travel mode to
reverse mode, and visa versa), operation
cylinder 28, hydraulic booster 31, lever 40,
tank 2, connecting pipelines and oil conduits.
Hydraulic booster 31 is of static model and is
intended for reduction of effort applied on
pedals 10 and 12 in the process of clutch
disengagement. It is connected via oil conduit
11 to the transmission hydraulic system
pump, and via hose 41 to clutch body drain.
In the forward movement mode when
pressing pedal 10 breaking fluid from main
cylinder 1 via pipeline 20 is supplied to cock
21. In cock 21 piston moves to the end right
position closes pipeline inlet 22. Then via
hose 23 braking fluid is supplied to operation
cylinder 28, thus moving piston 29. Piston 29
actuates pusher 30 of hydraulic booster 31,
resulting in hydraulic booster 31 operation,
extension of the piston and tie-bar 36, shifting
lever 40, which is via roller pushing the
clutch, leads to disconnection of the engine
from transmission.
In the reverse operating mode, when pressing
pedal 12, braking fluid via pipeline 22 from
main cylinder 19 is supplied to cock 21. In
cock 21 the piston moves to the end left
position and closes pump line inlet 20. Then
braking fluid via hose 23 is supplied to wheel
cylinder
28, performing described above functions.
In the clutch drive system “Neva M” TU
2451-053-36732629-2003, or “ROSDOT”
TU-004-36732629-99 braking fluids are used.
Transmission
Free
wheeling
Free
wheeling
Clutch body
CLUTCH CONTROL
1 – forward movement main cylinder; 2 – tank; 3 – spring; 4, 17 –bolt; 5, 7, 15, 18, 25, 37 – nut; 6, 13, 30 –
pusher; 8;, 16, 38 – yoke; 9, 32, 39 – pin; 10 – forward travel clutch pedal; 11 – oil conduit; 12 – reverse
mode clutch pedal; 14 – sheathing; 19 – reverse mode main cylinder; 20, 22 – pipe line; 21 – cock; 23 –
hose; 24 – support; 26 – by-pass valve; 27 – safety cup; 28 – operation cylinder; 29 – piston; 31 – hydraulic
booster; 33, 34 – arm; 35 – pull out spring; 36 – tie-bar; 40 – lever; 41 – hose.
MTZ 2022/2022V Section 5. Design and operation
- - remove wheel cylinder 28 from arm
Adjustment of clutch control 33,having pulled out pin 32;
There are several stages of clutch control - set piston 29 in cylinder 28 to end
adjustment: right position up to the cover;
1. Adjustment of clearance between a - set piston 29 of cylinder 28 until it
piston and pusher 6 of main cylinder smoothly touches pusher 30 of
piston 1 (forward travel) hydraulic booster 31, and by screwing
- insert pusher 6 of main cylinder 2 in or unscrewing support 24, align
yoke 8, having observed distance B, support and arm openings 33;
then tighten nut 7. - screw in support 25 by ½ turns, place
- by screwing and unscrewing bolt 4 to pin 32, tighten it with a pin, tighten
set clearance between piston and check nut 25.
pusher 6 of main cylinder piston 2,
adjust free pedal movement 10 to Circulate oil through clutch control hydraulic
within 6…12 mm (as measured by system.
cover center);
- tighten check nut 5.
2. Adjustment of clearance between piston

and main cylinder piston pusher 19
(reverse mode operation);
- take off cover 14;
- unlock pusher 13;
- insert main cylinder pusher 13 in yoke
16, having observed distance B;
- tighten nut 15 and put on cover 14;
- by screwing and unscrewing bolt 17 to
ensure clearance between piston of
main cylinder piston 19 pusher 13,
adjust pedal 12 free travel within
6…12 mm (as measured by cover
center);
- tighten check nut 18.
3. Adjustment of clutch shifter free travel:
- remove spring 35;

- disconnect tie-bar 36 from lever 40,
pulling pin 39 out;
- unlock yoke 38;
- turn lever 40 anti clock-wise to the
end of pressure bearing to squeeze
levers and, turning yoke 38, align
lever and yoke openings;
- tighten yoke 38 by 5…5.5 turns and
connect to lever 40 by means of pins
39;
- tighten check nut 37, secure pin 39
with a cotter pin, put spring 35 in
place.
4. Adjustment of clearance between piston

29 of cylinder 28 and pusher 30 of
hydraulic booster 31:
Circulating oil through clutch control 3. Checking hydraulic system bleeding as

hydraulic system per item 1.
CAUTION! During hydraulic system
Before the operation fill braking fluid in tank bleeding:
2 of forward travel main cylinder, and - for forward travel keep braking
compensation chamber of main cylinder 19 fluid level in tank 2 within marks
for reverse movement mode. “MIN” and “MAX”;
- for the reverse movement mode
1.To circulate oil through the hydraulic keep braking fluid level in main
system for forward travel, do the following: cylinder compensation chamber 19
not lower than 15 mm from
- fill braking fluid in tank 2 to level compensation chamber upper rim.
“MAX”;;
- take safety cup 27 off cylinder 28 and Upon checking clutch control adjustments,
put rubber hose on by-pass valve head check noise of clutch disengagement; to this
26, having dipped it in braking fluid end:
reservoir; - start the tractor and set diesel rotation
- press clutch pedal several times; frequency to 1400 +/- 100 rev/min;
keeping it pressed, unscrew by-pass - pull the parking brake back to the full;
valve 26 by one fourth of the turn and - press clutch pedal to the full and in at
let excessive braking fluid with air least 5 seconds shift GB gear, which
bulbs out into the braking fluid should be noiseless.
reservoir; If this requirement is not observed, check
- tighten by-pass valve 26 and release adjustments anew.
clutch pedal;
- pump the system until air bulbs in
braking fluid being drained disappear
completely;
- take the hose off and put safety cup 27
in place;
- check braking fluid in tank 4 and
refill, if necessary.
2. To circulate oil in the hydraulic system

for reverse movement mode, do the
following:
- take case 14 of main cylinder 19;

- check braking fluid in main cylinder
compensation chamber 19, which
should not be less than 15 mm lower
from upper compensation chamber
rim;
- the order of bleeding the hydraulic
system is similar that of forward travel
mode.
Possible clutch malfunctions
Table 5-2
Malfunction, appearance Correction methods
GB gears are shifted with grinding sound ( not full clutch disengagement)
Clutch control is not adjusted Make adjustments
Squeeze levers are out of level Make adjustments
Driven discs’ bushings jam in power shaft Clean and grease cotter pins. If worn out or
cotter pins damaged, replace discs or the power shaft.
Increased wobbling of driven discs’ blades Replace discs
Flywheel bearing is destroyed Replace the bearing
Air entrapped in the system Find out the trouble. Bleed the hydraulic dive
system
Loss of pressure in operation cavities of main Replace sealing rings. Bleed the system.
and operation cylinders due to sealing rings
damage
Oil leakage through sealing rings of the Replace sealing rings in the hydraulic booster
hydraulic booster.
Clutch slips ( not full clutch engagement)
Clutch control is not adjusted Make adjustments
Oiling of driven discs lining and adjacent Remove causes of oil trapping. Rinse oiled
friction surfaces surfaces with benzene.
Lining of clutch driven discs is worn out Replace lining or discs in assembly
Shrinkage of pressure springs Replace springs
Jamming of main and operation cylinders’ Replace sealing rings. Bleed the system
pusher due to swelling of sealing rings
The hydraulic drive system is impossible to bleed in the reverse mode
(MTZ – 2522V/2822V)
Damage or wear out of the sealing ring of Replace sealing rings. Bleed the system.
main cylinder rod of the reversing mechanism
5.3 GEAR BOX
The gear box is of mechanical, step-wise, synchronizers. The gear box provides 24
permanently clutched pinions, range-type gears for forward travel and 12 gears for
(four front travel ranges and two ranges of reverse movement, as well as front drive axle
reverse movement mode) design, with six drive.
gears within each range shifted by means of
1 – intermediate shaft; 2, 4, 14, 30, 33, 46, 49 – nuts; 3 – main drive; 5, 7, 8, 13, 20, 22, 23, 31, 34,
35, 38, 39, 43, 44, 50, 51, 52, 54, 55, 56 – pinions; 6, 12, 27, 53 – synchronizers; yokes’ body; 10,
18 – yokes; 11- hydraulic cylinder; 15 – ball fixing element; 16, 17 – levers; 19 – drag bar; 21, 36,
40 – bushings; 24, 45 – roller bearings; 25, 48 – adjusting washers; 26 – main output shaft; 28 –
shaft of pinions block; 29 – shaft of independent PTO drive; 32 – shaft of reduced gears and reverse
movement; 37, 42 – toothed clutches; 41 – stop ring; 47 – shaft; 57 – GB body.
5.3.1. Gear box design between pinions (20) and (22) is effected by
way of synchronizer (27)
The gear box (see figure on page 72) consists Parts’ assemblies on all shafts are tighten by
of the body, gear block, reduced gears and nuts (2), (4), (14), (30), (33), (46) and (49).
reverse movement shaft; pinions block; main
output shaft – a pinion; control mechanism an
hydraulic system.
Gear assembly consists of main output shaft

that bears drive pinions (8), (13), (5) and (7)
installed on needle bearings. They provide
shifting of gears 3, 4, 5, and 6
correspondingly, and 1 and 2 gears shifting
pinions are made as one assembly with shaft
(3).Shaft splines carry two synchronizers (6)
and (12), shifting gears 3, 4, 5 and 6.
Countershaft (1) bears with interference

driven gears (51), (50), (56) and (55) for gears
3, 4, 5 and 6 correspondingly are installed on
needle bearings. Shaft splines bear
synchronizer (53) for switching gears 1 and 2.
Reduced gears and reverse movement shaft

(32) has pinion (39) of forward travel ranges I
and II, and pinion (35) of reverse movement
ranges I and II. Splined bushing (40) bears
movement reducing pinion (43). Driven
pinion (44) is installed on splines of shaft
(47). If movement reducer is not installed,
pinion (44) is connected to reduced gear shaft
via pinion (43) and splined bushing (40).
Bushing (40 is connected to shaft (32) by
means of splines, and pinion (43) is fixed on
bushing (40) by retaining ring (41) to prevent
its axial travel.
Toothed coupling (37) serves to connect
pinions (35) and (39) to the shaft.
Pinion assembly shaft (26) bears pinions

(34) and (38) installed on splines. Pinion hub
(34) has FDA diving pinion (31) installed on
needle bearings.
Main output shaft-pinion (26) is installed in

GB case on coned roller bearings (24) and
(45). They are adjusted by means of washers
(48), and main output shaft (26) extension
(dimension 19.4 -0.13) is adjusted by selecting
of adjustment washer (25). The shaft has
immobile FDA driving pinion (23). The hub
has driven pinion (22) installed on needle
bearings. Bushing (21) carries driven pinion
(20) installed on needle bearings. Shifting
MTZ 2022/2022V –Operation manual Section 5. Design and operation
(20) and levers (8). These parts are mounted
5.3.2 GB control mechanism in control cover (9) and case (10).
The GB control mechanism consists of a

mechanism for shifting gears and a
mechanism for shifting ranges with an
electric-hydraulic system for switching higher The range shifting mechanism also has
("H”) and lower (“L”) stages of GB reduction electric-hydraulic system for control of
gear. shifting higher and lower stages of the
reduction gear. It includes hydraulic cylinder
Gears shifting mechanism is mounted in (11) (page 72), levers (16) and (17) , carrier
yokes’ case (9) (page 73), in control cover (9) (19) and yoke (18), The reduction gear
and body (57) (page 72). Gears are shifted by control system is described below. Tooth-type
means of yoke (16a) of GB shifting lever via couplers (37) and (42) are moved by yokes
lever (11a), shaft (19) and lever (8a). The fixed on carriers (not shown). Synchronizer
yokes’ case has three carriers on which yoke (27) is switched by the electric-hydraulic
(10) (page 72) and levers are installed. To system. Position of tooth-type couplers (37)
prevent simultaneous shifting of two gears and (42) in neutral and switched on state is
locking steel balls are installed between fixed by parts (6, 7a, 11) (page 77). In one of
carriers. To fix carriers and yokes in neutral its positions the synchronizer is fixed with a
and shifted positions, spring ball fixing ball with a spring and a pin. To exclude
elements are provided. simultaneous shifting of tooth-type couplers
(37) and (42), the GB case has locking steel
Range shifting mechanism consists of yoke balls (6) and pin(7) (page 77).
(16), range shifting handle, lever (11), shaft
1 – limiter; 2 – key; 3 – ball; 4 – nut; 5 – bolt; 6 – spring; 7 – bushing; 8, 8a – lever; 9 – cover; 10 –

case; 11, 11a – lever; 12 – pin; 13 – spring; 14 – sphere; 15 – sheath; 16, 16a – yoke; 17 – cover; 18
– pin; 19,20 – carriers; 21 – link.
5.3.3 System of GB reduction gear

control
Electric-hydraulic system consists of control
panel (1) situated the tractor cabin on The system allows to shift reduction gear
operator’s right, lever (3) for gears shifting stages only with lever (3) in neutral
and reduction gear stages, sensor (5), GB position (contacts of GB neutral sensor (5)
neutral, sensor (7) and (8), installed on are closed)
hydraulic cylinder for shifting reduction gear Signals are sent to LEDs (13, 12) and (15, 14)
(see item 11 on page 72), electric hydraulic from relative pressure sensors (8 and 7).
distributor (6), located on top of GB cover, After diesel start in the initial position lower
connecting cables (4) with shoes (9). The reduction gear stage is switched on. In this
system is connected to vehicle-borne electric case signal devices (13 and 15) should be
circuit via fuses box (2). Electric power is alight.
supplied to the system after diesel start. Higher reduction gear stage is shifted by
Lever handle (3) has buttons (10, 11) and pressing button (11) with signal devices (13
signal devices (light-emitting diodes) (13, 12) and 15) going down, and signal devices (12
of lower and higher reduction gear stages and 14) lighting.
correspondingly. To shift from higher to lower stage press
Panel (1) has signal devices (15, 14) of button (10).
switching of lower and higher stages of the Electric diagram of the system of GB
reduction gear and relay of reduction gear reduction gear control is shown on page 232.
control.
1 – control panel; 2 – a box of fuses; 3 – lever for shifting of reduction gear shifts and stages; 4 –
connecting cables; 5 – GB neutral sensor; 6 – reduction gear electric distributor; 7 – higher stage
pressure sensor; 8 – lower stage pressure sensor, 9 – connecting shoes; 10 – lower stage switching
button; 11 – higher stage switching button; 12 – higher stage light emitting diode; 13 – lower stage
light emitting diode; 14, 15 – control lamps.
Gears diagram of the tractor

5.3.4 Diesel start locking
To rule out the possibility of starting diesel the intermediate relay circuit of starter (1) and
with gear engaged, the tractor is equipped starter relay tie-rod (5)
with a special locking device To adjust switch disconnection washers (9)
The locking device consists of switch (8) are provided.
installed in GB case on the left, balls (6) and
pins (7, 7a). BEFORE STARTING DIESEL, SET GB
With range switched, the locking mechanism RANGE SHIFTING LEVER IN THE
disconnects contacts of the switch and breaks NEUTRAL POSITION!
1 – starter; 2 – generator; 3 – locking relay; 4 – starter switch; 5 – starter relay; 6 – balls of the
locking mechanism; 7, 7a – pins; 8 – lock switch; 9 – adjustment washers; 10 – range shift carriers;
11 – fixing element.
5.3.5. Possible GB malfunctions

Table 5-3
Low pressure in the hydraulic system
Insufficient amount of oil in the Fill in oil to mark “P” on oil measuring
transmission case window
Soiling of the hydraulic system mesh Rinse mesh filter
filter
Sticking of control valve of the filter- Rinse the valve of filter-distributor
distributor
High pressure in the hydraulic system
Sticking of control valve of the filter- Rinse the valve of filter-distributor
distributor
Oil drain ducts in the transmission are Rinse drain ducts
clogged
No pressure in the hydraulic system
Hydraulic system pump drive is switched Switch on the pump
off
Insufficient amount of oil in the Fill in oil to mark “P”
transmission
Noise when shifting gears
Clutch is not disengaged to the full Adjust the clutch
Wear out of coned surfaces of Replace worn out parts
synchronizers and pinions
High noise
Insufficient amount of oil in the Fill-in oil to mark “P”
transmission
Wear-out or breakage of bearings and Replace bearings and other elements
other transmission parts
5.3.6. The hydraulic system of transmission control and lubrication
1 – oil intake filter; 2 – six-pinion oil pump. 3 – safety valve; 4 – oil filter (meshed) 5, 6 – cam half-
clutches for rear axle DL; 7 – shift yoke; 8 – piston for switching rear axle DL; 9 – greasing of rear
axle differential; 10 – centrifugal oil filter-distributor; 11 – oil pressure gauge; 12 – oil conduct to
shafts and bearings; 13 – lubrication of rear axle planetary reduction gear; 14 – main outlet shaft; 15
– main valve; 16 – electric hydraulic valve of FDA control; 17 – electric hydraulic valve of rear
axle DL; 18 – reverse movement shaft; 19 – shaft of movement reducer; 20 – electric-hydraulic
valve for shifting GB reduction gear; 21 – oil pressure sensor ( lower stage of GB reduction gear);
22 – oil pressure sensor ( higher stage of GB reduction gear); 23 – hydraulic cylinder for GB
reduction gear switching; 24 – PTO friction clutch; 25 – friction clutch for braking PTO end; 26 –
friction clutch for driving FDA; 27 – hydraulic distributor for PTO control; 28 – gliding yoke
support for FDA dive.
The hydraulic system is designed for control hydraulic valves are connected by way of oil
of GB reduction gear, FDA dive, rear PTO, conduits to actuating mechanisms: friction
rear axle DL; as well as transmission bearings clutch for driving FDA (26), piston for
lubrication, cooling of its components and oil switching rear axle DL clutch on and off
purification. Six-pinion oil pump (2) with (5,6); hydraulic cylinder (23) for switching
switched off driving mechanism, is installed lower and higher stages of gear box reduction
to the left of clutch case. gear.
The pump sucks oil from the transmission Purified by centrifugal oil pump, oil is
refuel tank via meshed intake filter (1) and supplied to lubrication system under pressure
supplies it to the hydraulic system through 2.0…2.5 kgs/cm2, sustained by lubrication
safety valve (3), adjusted to pressure 18…20 valve (lower valve of filter-distributor).
kgs/cm2, to full-flow meshed filter (4) and on Through main pipeline (12) oil is supplied to
to centrifugal filter-distributor (10). Purified bearings of GB shaft bearings (14, 15, 18,
oil under pressure of 9…10 kgs/cm2 is 19), planetary reduction gears of rear axle end
supplied to electric-hydraulic valves (16, 17, transmissions (13), gliding yoke supports of
20) to control FDA drive, rear axle DL and FDA drive (28).
GB reduction gear, correspondingly. Under Oil drained through lubrication valve and
pressure oil is also supplied to hydraulic filter-distributor middle valve, lubricates the
distributor (27), controlling rear PTO, sending differential and rear axle main gear (9).
oil to friction clutches (24, 25). Electric
5.4. REAR AXLE
The rear axle consists of the main gear, the rear axle body, and finite gears located in
differential, electrically-hydraulically driven half-axles’ coupling.
lock cam clutch; tractor-borne gears located in
1 – driven pinion; 2 – bolt; 3, 13 – half-axle pinion; 4, 17 – brake; 5, 25 – coupling; 6, 19 – drive

pinion shaft; 7, 16 – cup; 8 – roller bearing; 9 – pinion of the drive tractor-borne gear; 10, 11a, 12a
– differential body; 11 – differential spider; 12 – satellite gear;14 – coned roller bearing; 15 – pinion
drive tractor-borne gear; 18 – cover; 20 – satellite gear; 21 – roller; 22 satellite gears’ axle; 23 –
driven pinion; 24, 42 – half-axle; 26 – washer; 27 - a set of spacers; 28 – bolt; 29 – locking plate; 30
– sun gear; 31 – carrier; 32 – crown gear; 33 - driven gear bushing; 34 – cam movable clutch; 35 –
cam immovable clutch; 36 – body; 37 – rear PTO; 38 – driven gear; driven gear bushing; 40, 43 –
shaft; 44 – cup.
5.4.1. Main gear Shafts of drive pinions (6) and (19) by way
of spline connections couple half-axle pinions
The main gear has coned shape with circular of the differential and drive pinions of
teeth, and consists of driving coned pinion, tractor-borne and brake discs (4, 17).
made in assembly with secondary GB shaft Driven pinions (22, 38) are set on spline
(see page 72) and driven pinion (1), fastened bushings (33, 39), mounted on ball bearings
with bolts (2) between differential bodies (10, on rear axle body (36) and cup (41, 44).
11a, 12a). Between cups' flanges (7, 16) and rear axle
body, 0.20 and 0.50 mm thick adjustment
5.4.2. Differential spacers are installed. By changing the number
of the latter axial clearance in coned roller
Differential is a coned, closed locked bearings (14) and side clearance of main gear
structure, consisting of three bodies (10, 11a, pinions’ engagement are adjusted.
12a) connected by bolts (2), a spider (11),
four satellite gears (12) with spherical 5.4.4. Finite gears
washers. The differential body in assembly is
mounted in rear axle case (36) on two coned Finite gears comprise of two spur planetary
roller bearings (14). The differential is locked gears situated in hoses (25, 42), and spline
by electrically-hydraulically driven cam shafts (43, 40), connecting driven pinions (23,
clutch (34, 35), mounted on bushings (33, 39) 38) to planetary gears.
of drive gears (9, 15), and by means of shafts The planetary gear consists of fixed crown
(6, 19) locks differential half-axle gears (3, pinion (32) mounted on cup teeth (44), carrier
13). (31), sun pinion (30), four satellite gears (20)
rotating on satellite gears’ axles (22) on roller
5.4.3. Tractor-borne gears bearings (21).
Coned roller bearings (45) of half-axles (24,
Tractor-borne gears consist of two pairs of 42) are adjusted by selecting a set of 0.2 mm
spur pinions (9, 38) and (15, 23). and 0.5 mm thick spacers put between half-
Drive pinions (9, 15) are set on spline shafts axle end face and washer (26).
(6, 19) mounted on roller bearings (8) in cups
(7, 16).
5.4.5. Mechanism of differential lock - install and fasten the arm and tighten
stopper (9);
Cam hydraulically controlled clutch for - while unscrewing screw (10) bring
differential locking is mounted on driven movable half-clutch (5) to the end of
pinions (1, 7) spline bushings (2, 6) of the end face of fixed half-clutch cams (4),
tractor-borne gear. It consists of half-clutch and then screw up the screw by 1…1.5
(4) fixed on the bushing with pin (3), and turns to ensure required clearance and
movable half-clutch (5) mounted on bushing tighten screw (9).
splines (6) and driven by electrical-hydraulic
system (see page 82).
Differential is locked through engagement of

half-clutches (4, 5) by moving half-clutch (5)
under impact of yoke (13), moved by piston
(11) when oil is supplied under pressure to
duct “A” in the rear axle upper cover (14).
Piston with yoke and squeeze springs (12) are
installed in arm (8) fastened to cover 3M.
When half-clutches are engaged, spline
bushings (2, 6) and drive pinions of planetary
finite gears interlock.
Differential is unlocked automatically under

impact of squeeze springs (12) when duct “A”
is in communication with drain (pressure
relief).
Adjustment of locking mechanism
No adjustments are required in the process of

operation. After repair works adjust clearance
of 1.5…2.0 mm between end faces of cam
half- clutches (4, 5), having performed the
following operations:
- set cams of half-clutch (4) opposite to
cams of half-clutch (5) with arm taken
off;
5.4.6. System of differential lock ( DL) control for rear axle
The system of rear axle DL control consists of for switching cam clutch of rear axle DL,
control panel (1), situated in the tractor cabin connecting cables (9) with connector
to the right of an operator, sensor (10) of dive assembly (4) and shoes (12). The system
wheels turning angle, two sensors (13) of operates from tractor-borne electric circuit
work brakes operational state situated under through box of fuses (2). The system power
brake pedals electrical hydraulic distributor supply is switched on after diesel start from
(6), installed on the right GB cover and start relay block (3).
hydraulically connected to hydraulic cylinder
The control system for rear axle differential lock (DL), and front drive axle (FDA) drive:
1 – control panel; 2 – box of fuses; 3 – starting relays block; 4 – connector; 5 – reverse sensor; 6 –
electric-hydraulic distributor of DL control; 7 – sensor of automatic FDA dive switching; 8 –
hydraulic distributor of FDA drive switching; 9 – connecting cables; 10 – sensor of drive wheels
turn angle; 12 – connecting shoes; 13 – sensors of the switched state of work brakes; 14, 16 – signal
elements; 15 – switch for FDA drive control; 17 – DL control switch; 18 – HLS switch; 19 – sound
alarm switch (2022V).
Panel 1 accommodates pushbutton switch electric-hydraulic distributor (6) is switched

(17) for rear axle DL control, and signal on and directs flow of oil under pressure to
element (16) indicating switched on state of head end of the hydraulic cylinder piston, cam
rear axle DL. clutch is switched on, and DL is blocked.
Pushbutton (17) has three positions: Differential is unblocked automatically when
- “Automatic lock” ( upper part of the drive wheels turn to more than 13 0 angle to
pushbutton is pressed – fixed any side, or when one or both work brakes are
position); engaged.
- “Forced lock” ( lower part of the If short-term locking of rear wheels is
pushbutton is pressed – non-fixed required, during turning including, press
position); lower part of pushbutton (17) to position
- “Lock is switched off” ( middle part – “forced lock” and keep it pressed. Releasing
fixed position). the pushbutton results in unlocking ( “lock is
switched off”).
When pushbutton (17) is in position “lock is
switched off”, power is not supplied to CAUTION! With locking switched on,
electric-hydraulic distributor (6), head end of tractor movement speed should not exceed
the cylinder piston communicates with 12 km/h. DO NOT operate the tractor with
exhaust and DL clutch is unlocked. permanently switched on differential
With pushbutton (17) in position “automatic locking when travelling on hard surface
lock” (when rear wheels have considerable roads!
relative slippage during work performance),
5.4.7. Possible rear axle malfunctions
Table 5-4
Fault, appearance Correction methods
Increased noise in the main gear
Wrong adjustment of main gear pinions Make adjustment of main gear engagement according
engagement according to contact spot to contact spot.
and side clearance Make adjustment of the side clearance in main gear set
engagement (0.25…0.55 mm)
Adjustment of main gear cone bearings is Make adjustment of bearings tension
disturbed
Low oil level in the transmission body Check oil level in the transmission body, re-fill, if
necessary

Damage of pinions’ teeth Check the state of pinions’ toothed rings.
Cracks and pitting are not allowed Replace
pinions with damaged teeth in set
Differential locking doesn’t function
Low pressure of oil supplied to hydraulic Check oil pressure. If pressure is below 900
cylinder piston head end of the locking kPa, find out and correct the fault.
clutch. Check operation ability of fuses, relays and
Electrical-hydraulic distributor of lock other electric circuit elements, easiness of the
control doesn’t function control valve, correct the trouble
Low pressure in the transmission hydraulic system
Shortage of oil in the transmission body. Re-fill oil to mark “P” on oil-measuring
Meshed filter of the hydraulic system is window.
soiled. Rinse meshed filter.
The by-pass valve of filter-distributor Rinse filter-distributor valve
hangs.
High pressure in the transmission hydraulic system
The by-pass valve of the filter-distributor Rinse filter-distributor valve
hangs.
The hydraulic system pump drive is Switch on the pump.
switched off. Re-fill oil to mark “P”
Shortage of oil in the transmission
Noisy gears shifting
Clutch is not disengaged to the full. Adjust the clutch.
Wear-out of coned surfaces of Replace worn-out parts.
High noise
Shortage of oil in the transmission. Re-fill oil to mark “P”.
Wear-out or destruction of bearings and Replace bearings and other parts.
other transmission parts.
5.5. REAR POWER TAKE-OFF SHAFT
Rear PTO has an independent drive with four drive is effected from the diesel via two pairs
speed modes, that are provided by a two- of cylindrical pinions in the clutch body, GB
speed reduction gear in the clutch body, and interior shaft, shifting clutch and PTO
replaceable ends (15) (540 rev/min) and (16) reduction gear. Clutch (1) is used for
(1000 rev/min) in PTO reduction gear. The switching the drive on and off.
1 – shifting clutch; 2 – drive shaft; 3 – friction disc; 4 – intermediate disc; 5 – drum; 6 – brake disc;
7 – intermediate axle; 8 – roller; 9 – pinion; 10 – body; 11 – valve; 12 – cover; 13 – thrust washer;
14 – sheath; 15, 16 – replaceable ends; 17 – bushing; 18 – coned roller bearing; 19 – ring; 20 –
washer; 21 – nut; 22,23 – pinion; 24 – brake piston; 25 – thrust disc; 26 – friction gear piston; 27 –
spring; 28 – cover.
Reduction gear of the power take-off shaft is to replaceable ends (15, 16) depending on the
mounted in the rear axle body and consists of required operation mode: with pinion (22) –
driven (22) and drive pinions (23) axially 540 rev/min*; pinion (23) – 1000 rev/min*.
placed and interconnected by means of three Ends are mounted on coned roller bearings
equally spaced intermediate pinions (9) (18) and fixed with thrust washer to avoid
assembled on axles (7) in reduction gear body axial movement. To replace the end, take off
(10). washer 13, change the end and fix it. The end
Drive and driven pinions have spline faces bear marks: “540” and “1000”
openings, by way of which they are connected correspondingly.
_____________________________________________
*) To put gear switch (35a) to position “I” (see page 40)
To engage and disengage PTO, multi-disc Friction disc (6) is mounted on drum splintes
friction clutch and PTO brake are used. Drive (5). When pressure rises in the brake booster,
shaft (2) clutch splintes of the friction gear are piston (24) squeezes discs (6) and (25),
provided with metal-ceramic lined discs (3), braking drum and PTO end.
and in drum (5) slots, connected to drive In neutral position, the end can be easily
pinion (23) reduction gear by way of splintes, rotated “by hand”.
and intermediate discs (4). With PTO
switched on, under oil pressure piston (26) Note: 1. Axial clearance in coned roller
squeezes discs, thus connecting PTO bearings (18) should not exceed 0.10
reduction gear to drive shaft (2). mm. Make adjustment by selecting
With friction clutch switched off, piston (26) rings (19) Torque nuts (21) to 220 Nm.
resets under impact of springs (27). Stand-by 2. With PTO speed switch (35a) (see
driven PTO brake eliminates the end move page 40) put in position “II”, and
and stoppage. The brake is mounted in replaceable ends in place , as shown
reduction gear body (10) and consists of above, two additional speeds of
piston (24), friction disc (6) and thrust disc independent PTO are obtained (720 and
(25). 1460 rev/min).
5.5.1 Rear PTO control When diesel is not operational, or when

pressure in the transmission hydraulic system
Rear PTO is controlled by handle (1) (see drops to below 0.8 mPa, handle (1) under
figure below) of lever (15) located on the effect of spring (6) automatically resets from
console of side control panel (lever 30, page the end upper position to neutral. Make
28). It moves by means of steel rope (7) and following adjustment of rear PTO control:
tie-rod (13) rotating lever (10) for control of
distribution control valve (9), which is - set handle (1) and lever (10) of
intended for control of oil supplied to friction distributor (11) in neutral position;
gear and brake. - by changing length of steel rope
Handle (1) (figure on page 86a) has three rod(5) ( by screwing yoke up or down
positions: yoke (3) , having in advance released
- end front – “PTO switched on”; check nut (4) and tie-rod (13) (
- end rear – PTO end brake switched screwing it up or down the rod, having
on”; in advance released check nut (8),
- middle – “PTO and brake switched align openings in yoke (3) and lever
off”. (14) of switch (15), as well as in tie-
Distribution lever (10) is fixed in three rod (13) and lever (10) of distributor
positions with diesel in operation: upper – (11), bring them together with your
“PTO switched on”; lower – “brake switched fingers (2, 12) and fix with pin. After
on”, and middle (neutral) – “PTO and brake completing adjustments tighten check
switched off”. nuts (4) and (8).
Design version
1 – control handle; 2 – pin; 3 – yoke; 4 – check nut; 5 – steel rope rod; 6 – spring; 7 – steel rope; 8 –
check nut; 9 – distributor; 10 – lever; 11 – tap; 12 – pin; 13 – tie-rod; 14 – lever; 15 lever.
 Check operation of the control neutral handle (1) position. The control
mechanism. With force of maximum 30 N handle has two fixed positions: the end front –
(3 kgs) applied, handle (1) should move (PTO switched on), and end rear – “brake of
easily and with no jams , and be fixed PTO end switched on”.
accurately in three positions with diesel in
operation. With non-operational diesel it CAUTION! To engage PTO, smoothly push
should reset from end front position to the control handle with 2…4 s delay in the
neutral by means of spring (6). middle of shifting from neutral to PTO
In the hydraulic version of PTO control (see switch on.
illustrated design version below), instead of For the latter design version: (when shifting
distributor (9) a cock (11) with a damper ( in from rear position to PTO switch on) to
the form of pneumatic coupler that ensures avoid breakage of drive shaft, reduction gear
smoothness of PTO start) can be installed. pinions and PTO end.
The difference against described above design
lies in the absence of return spring (6) and
5.5.2 Possible rear PTO malfunctions
Table 5 – 5
Rear PTO doesn’t fully transfer torque, or keeps rotating after PTO brake is engaged
Control adjustment is violated Using distributor adjust control

Low oil pressure in the transmission Adjust reduction valve of transmission HS.
hydraulic system.
Low oil pressure at the outlet to friction gear Check pressure, if required, check sealing rings of
and PTO brake due to: the friction gear and PTO reduction gear brake, or
a) leakage in the distributor, friction gear replace distributor.
and PTO brake;
b) distributor main valve seizure Dismantle distributor, clean and rinse parts,
remove causes of seizure, replace damaged parts, if
necessary.
Violation of friction gear or brake operation Rinse friction gear and brake parts in pure diesel
due to pistons hang or wear-out of friction fuel, replace friction discs, if required.
discs
5.6. FRONT PTO (ONCE INSTALLED)
The front PTO (FPTO) is design for driving agricultural machinery, being mounted on front hinge
mechanism. It is independently driven with clock-wise rotation of the end, if looking at its end
face. It provides the end frequency rotation of 1000 rev/min at diesel rotation frequency of 1845
rev/min and power output of 44 kW (60 h/p) maximum.
FPTO (fig A) is driven by pulley (1) of diesel crankshaft and reduction gear (4) via distance piece
(2), permanently installed in pulley (1), and crankshaft (3).
1 – pulley; 2 – distance piece (spacer); 3 – crankshaft; 4 – FPTO reduction gear “A” – distance of
rod extension
In FPTO reduction gear (figure B, page 89) connected to turn roller (18) effecting levers
power is transferred from shaft (12) to end (1) (19) of belt brakes.
by means of shifted toothed clutch (11) Hydraulic cylinder (5) rod (see figure below)
installed on shaft (12), pinion (10), moves by changing oil flow direction in
intermediate pinion (24), pinion (17) mounted electric-hydraulic distributor (1).
on shaft (16), which is connected to crown Oil flow coming along forced pipelined (2) is
pinion (9) of the planetary reduction gear. directed either to pipeline (3) connected to rod
FPTO is unified with rear PTO planetary end head of cylinder (5) ( FPTO is switched
reduction gear of tractors MTZ-80. It is off – rod is drawn in), or to pipeline (4),
controlled by hydraulic cylinder (5), connected to piston end head of cylinder (5),
(FPTO is switched on – the rod is withdrawn).
1 - electric-hydraulic distributor; 2 – forced oil conduit; 3 - oil conduit of hydraulic cylinder rod
head end; 4 – oil conduit of hydraulic cylinder piston head end; 5 – hydraulic cylinder.
5.3.6. The hydraulic system of transmission control and lubrication
1 – oil intake filter; 2 – six-pinion oil pump. 3 – safety valve; 4 – oil filter (meshed) 5, 6 – cam half-
clutches for rear axle DL; 7 – shift yoke; 8 – piston for switching rear axle DL; 9 – greasing of rear
axle differential; 10 – centrifugal oil filter-distributor; 11 – oil pressure gauge; 12 – oil conduct to
shafts and bearings; 13 – lubrication of rear axle planetary reduction gear; 14 – main outlet shaft; 15
– main valve; 16 – electric hydraulic valve of FDA control; 17 – electric hydraulic valve of rear
axle DL; 18 – reverse movement shaft; 19 – shaft of movement reducer; 20 – electric-hydraulic
valve for shifting GB reduction gear; 21 – oil pressure sensor ( lower stage of GB reduction gear);
22 – oil pressure sensor ( higher stage of GB reduction gear); 23 – hydraulic cylinder for GB
reduction gear switching; 24 – PTO friction clutch; 25 – friction clutch for braking PTO end; 26 –
friction clutch for driving FDA; 27 – hydraulic distributor for PTO control; 28 – gliding yoke
support for FDA dive.
The hydraulic system is designed for control hydraulic valves are connected by way of oil
of GB reduction gear, FDA dive, rear PTO, conduits to actuating mechanisms: friction
rear axle DL; as well as transmission bearings clutch for driving FDA (26), piston for
lubrication, cooling of its components and oil switching rear axle DL clutch on and off
purification. Six-pinion oil pump (2) with (5,6); hydraulic cylinder (23) for switching
switched off driving mechanism, is installed lower and higher stages of gear box reduction
to the left of clutch case. gear.
The pump sucks oil from the transmission Purified by centrifugal oil pump, oil is
refuel tank via meshed intake filter (1) and supplied to lubrication system under pressure
supplies it to the hydraulic system through 2.0…2.5 kgs/cm2, sustained by lubrication
safety valve (3), adjusted to pressure 18…20 valve (lower valve of filter-distributor).
kgs/cm2, to full-flow meshed filter (4) and on Through main pipeline (12) oil is supplied to
to centrifugal filter-distributor (10). Purified bearings of GB shaft bearings (14, 15, 18,
oil under pressure of 9…10 kgs/cm2 is 19), planetary reduction gears of rear axle end
supplied to electric-hydraulic valves (16, 17, transmissions (13), gliding yoke supports of
20) to control FDA drive, rear axle DL and FDA drive (28).
GB reduction gear, correspondingly. Under Oil drained through lubrication valve and
pressure oil is also supplied to hydraulic filter-distributor middle valve, lubricates the
distributor (27), controlling rear PTO, sending differential and rear axle main gear (9).
oil to friction clutches (24, 25). Electric
5.4. REAR AXLE
The rear axle consists of the main gear, the rear axle body, and finite gears located in
differential, electrically-hydraulically driven half-axles’ coupling.
lock cam clutch; tractor-borne gears located in
1 – driven pinion; 2 – bolt; 3, 13 – half-axle pinion; 4, 17 – brake; 5, 25 – coupling; 6, 19 – drive

pinion shaft; 7, 16 – cup; 8 – roller bearing; 9 – pinion of the drive tractor-borne gear; 10, 11a, 12a
– differential body; 11 – differential spider; 12 – satellite gear;14 – coned roller bearing; 15 – pinion
drive tractor-borne gear; 18 – cover; 20 – satellite gear; 21 – roller; 22 satellite gears’ axle; 23 –
driven pinion; 24, 42 – half-axle; 26 – washer; 27 - a set of spacers; 28 – bolt; 29 – locking plate; 30
– sun gear; 31 – carrier; 32 – crown gear; 33 - driven gear bushing; 34 – cam movable clutch; 35 –
cam immovable clutch; 36 – body; 37 – rear PTO; 38 – driven gear; driven gear bushing; 40, 43 –
shaft; 44 – cup.
5.4.1. Main gear Shafts of drive pinions (6) and (19) by way
of spline connections couple half-axle pinions
The main gear has coned shape with circular of the differential and drive pinions of
teeth, and consists of driving coned pinion, tractor-borne and brake discs (4, 17).
made in assembly with secondary GB shaft Driven pinions (22, 38) are set on spline
(see page 72) and driven pinion (1), fastened bushings (33, 39), mounted on ball bearings
with bolts (2) between differential bodies (10, on rear axle body (36) and cup (41, 44).
11a, 12a). Between cups' flanges (7, 16) and rear axle
body, 0.20 and 0.50 mm thick adjustment
5.4.2. Differential spacers are installed. By changing the number
of the latter axial clearance in coned roller
Differential is a coned, closed locked bearings (14) and side clearance of main gear
structure, consisting of three bodies (10, 11a, pinions’ engagement are adjusted.
12a) connected by bolts (2), a spider (11),
four satellite gears (12) with spherical 5.4.4. Finite gears
washers. The differential body in assembly is
mounted in rear axle case (36) on two coned Finite gears comprise of two spur planetary
roller bearings (14). The differential is locked gears situated in hoses (25, 42), and spline
by electrically-hydraulically driven cam shafts (43, 40), connecting driven pinions (23,
clutch (34, 35), mounted on bushings (33, 39) 38) to planetary gears.
of drive gears (9, 15), and by means of shafts The planetary gear consists of fixed crown
(6, 19) locks differential half-axle gears (3, pinion (32) mounted on cup teeth (44), carrier
13). (31), sun pinion (30), four satellite gears (20)
rotating on satellite gears’ axles (22) on roller
5.4.3. Tractor-borne gears bearings (21).
Coned roller bearings (45) of half-axles (24,
Tractor-borne gears consist of two pairs of 42) are adjusted by selecting a set of 0.2 mm
spur pinions (9, 38) and (15, 23). and 0.5 mm thick spacers put between half-
Drive pinions (9, 15) are set on spline shafts axle end face and washer (26).
(6, 19) mounted on roller bearings (8) in cups
(7, 16).
5.4.5. Mechanism of differential lock - install and fasten the arm and tighten
stopper (9);
Cam hydraulically controlled clutch for - while unscrewing screw (10) bring
differential locking is mounted on driven movable half-clutch (5) to the end of
pinions (1, 7) spline bushings (2, 6) of the end face of fixed half-clutch cams (4),
tractor-borne gear. It consists of half-clutch and then screw up the screw by 1…1.5
(4) fixed on the bushing with pin (3), and turns to ensure required clearance and
movable half-clutch (5) mounted on bushing tighten screw (9).
splines (6) and driven by electrical-hydraulic
system (see page 82).
Differential is locked through engagement of

half-clutches (4, 5) by moving half-clutch (5)
under impact of yoke (13), moved by piston
(11) when oil is supplied under pressure to
duct “A” in the rear axle upper cover (14).
Piston with yoke and squeeze springs (12) are
installed in arm (8) fastened to cover 3M.
When half-clutches are engaged, spline
bushings (2, 6) and drive pinions of planetary
finite gears interlock.
Differential is unlocked automatically under

impact of squeeze springs (12) when duct “A”
is in communication with drain (pressure
relief).
Adjustment of locking mechanism
No adjustments are required in the process of

operation. After repair works adjust clearance
of 1.5…2.0 mm between end faces of cam
half- clutches (4, 5), having performed the
- set cams of half-clutch (4) opposite to
cams of half-clutch (5) with arm taken
off;
5.4.6. System of differential lock ( DL) control for rear axle
The system of rear axle DL control consists of for switching cam clutch of rear axle DL,
control panel (1), situated in the tractor cabin connecting cables (9) with connector
to the right of an operator, sensor (10) of dive assembly (4) and shoes (12). The system
wheels turning angle, two sensors (13) of operates from tractor-borne electric circuit
work brakes operational state situated under through box of fuses (2). The system power
brake pedals electrical hydraulic distributor supply is switched on after diesel start from
(6), installed on the right GB cover and start relay block (3).
hydraulically connected to hydraulic cylinder
The control system for rear axle differential lock (DL), and front drive axle (FDA) drive:
1 – control panel; 2 – box of fuses; 3 – starting relays block; 4 – connector; 5 – reverse sensor; 6 –
electric-hydraulic distributor of DL control; 7 – sensor of automatic FDA dive switching; 8 –
hydraulic distributor of FDA drive switching; 9 – connecting cables; 10 – sensor of drive wheels
turn angle; 12 – connecting shoes; 13 – sensors of the switched state of work brakes; 14, 16 – signal
elements; 15 – switch for FDA drive control; 17 – DL control switch; 18 – HLS switch; 19 – sound
alarm switch (2022V).
Panel 1 accommodates pushbutton switch electric-hydraulic distributor (6) is switched

(17) for rear axle DL control, and signal on and directs flow of oil under pressure to
element (16) indicating switched on state of head end of the hydraulic cylinder piston, cam
rear axle DL. clutch is switched on, and DL is blocked.
Pushbutton (17) has three positions: Differential is unblocked automatically when
- “Automatic lock” ( upper part of the drive wheels turn to more than 13 0 angle to
pushbutton is pressed – fixed any side, or when one or both work brakes are
position); engaged.
- “Forced lock” ( lower part of the If short-term locking of rear wheels is
pushbutton is pressed – non-fixed required, during turning including, press
position); lower part of pushbutton (17) to position
- “Lock is switched off” ( middle part – “forced lock” and keep it pressed. Releasing
fixed position). the pushbutton results in unlocking ( “lock is
switched off”).
When pushbutton (17) is in position “lock is
switched off”, power is not supplied to CAUTION! With locking switched on,
electric-hydraulic distributor (6), head end of tractor movement speed should not exceed
the cylinder piston communicates with 12 km/h. DO NOT operate the tractor with
exhaust and DL clutch is unlocked. permanently switched on differential
With pushbutton (17) in position “automatic locking when travelling on hard surface
lock” (when rear wheels have considerable roads!
relative slippage during work performance),
5.4.7. Possible rear axle malfunctions
Table 5-4
Fault, appearance Correction methods
Increased noise in the main gear
Wrong adjustment of main gear pinions Make adjustment of main gear engagement according
engagement according to contact spot to contact spot.
and side clearance Make adjustment of the side clearance in main gear set
engagement (0.25…0.55 mm)
Adjustment of main gear cone bearings is Make adjustment of bearings tension
disturbed
Low oil level in the transmission body Check oil level in the transmission body, re-fill, if
necessary

Damage of pinions’ teeth Check the state of pinions’ toothed rings.
Cracks and pitting are not allowed Replace
pinions with damaged teeth in set
Differential locking doesn’t function
Low pressure of oil supplied to hydraulic Check oil pressure. If pressure is below 900
cylinder piston head end of the locking kPa, find out and correct the fault.
clutch. Check operation ability of fuses, relays and
Electrical-hydraulic distributor of lock other electric circuit elements, easiness of the
control doesn’t function control valve, correct the trouble
Low pressure in the transmission hydraulic system
Shortage of oil in the transmission body. Re-fill oil to mark “P” on oil-measuring
Meshed filter of the hydraulic system is window.
soiled. Rinse meshed filter.
The by-pass valve of filter-distributor Rinse filter-distributor valve
hangs.
High pressure in the transmission hydraulic system
The by-pass valve of the filter-distributor Rinse filter-distributor valve
hangs.
The hydraulic system pump drive is Switch on the pump.
switched off. Re-fill oil to mark “P”
Shortage of oil in the transmission
Noisy gears shifting
Clutch is not disengaged to the full. Adjust the clutch.
Wear-out of coned surfaces of Replace worn-out parts.
High noise
Shortage of oil in the transmission. Re-fill oil to mark “P”.
Wear-out or destruction of bearings and Replace bearings and other parts.
other transmission parts.
5.5. REAR POWER TAKE-OFF SHAFT
Rear PTO has an independent drive with four drive is effected from the diesel via two pairs
speed modes, that are provided by a two- of cylindrical pinions in the clutch body, GB
speed reduction gear in the clutch body, and interior shaft, shifting clutch and PTO
replaceable ends (15) (540 rev/min) and (16) reduction gear. Clutch (1) is used for
(1000 rev/min) in PTO reduction gear. The switching the drive on and off.
1 – shifting clutch; 2 – drive shaft; 3 – friction disc; 4 – intermediate disc; 5 – drum; 6 – brake disc;
7 – intermediate axle; 8 – roller; 9 – pinion; 10 – body; 11 – valve; 12 – cover; 13 – thrust washer;
14 – sheath; 15, 16 – replaceable ends; 17 – bushing; 18 – coned roller bearing; 19 – ring; 20 –
washer; 21 – nut; 22,23 – pinion; 24 – brake piston; 25 – thrust disc; 26 – friction gear piston; 27 –
spring; 28 – cover.
Reduction gear of the power take-off shaft is to replaceable ends (15, 16) depending on the
mounted in the rear axle body and consists of required operation mode: with pinion (22) –
driven (22) and drive pinions (23) axially 540 rev/min*; pinion (23) – 1000 rev/min*.
placed and interconnected by means of three Ends are mounted on coned roller bearings
equally spaced intermediate pinions (9) (18) and fixed with thrust washer to avoid
assembled on axles (7) in reduction gear body axial movement. To replace the end, take off
(10). washer 13, change the end and fix it. The end
Drive and driven pinions have spline faces bear marks: “540” and “1000”
openings, by way of which they are connected correspondingly.
_____________________________________________
*) To put gear switch (35a) to position “I” (see page 40)
To engage and disengage PTO, multi-disc Friction disc (6) is mounted on drum splintes
friction clutch and PTO brake are used. Drive (5). When pressure rises in the brake booster,
shaft (2) clutch splintes of the friction gear are piston (24) squeezes discs (6) and (25),
provided with metal-ceramic lined discs (3), braking drum and PTO end.
and in drum (5) slots, connected to drive In neutral position, the end can be easily
pinion (23) reduction gear by way of splintes, rotated “by hand”.
and intermediate discs (4). With PTO
switched on, under oil pressure piston (26) Note: 1. Axial clearance in coned roller
squeezes discs, thus connecting PTO bearings (18) should not exceed 0.10
reduction gear to drive shaft (2). mm. Make adjustment by selecting
With friction clutch switched off, piston (26) rings (19) Torque nuts (21) to 220 Nm.
resets under impact of springs (27). Stand-by 2. With PTO speed switch (35a) (see
driven PTO brake eliminates the end move page 40) put in position “II”, and
and stoppage. The brake is mounted in replaceable ends in place , as shown
reduction gear body (10) and consists of above, two additional speeds of
piston (24), friction disc (6) and thrust disc independent PTO are obtained (720 and
(25). 1460 rev/min).
5.5.1 Rear PTO control When diesel is not operational, or when

pressure in the transmission hydraulic system
Rear PTO is controlled by handle (1) (see drops to below 0.8 mPa, handle (1) under
figure below) of lever (15) located on the effect of spring (6) automatically resets from
console of side control panel (lever 30, page the end upper position to neutral. Make
28). It moves by means of steel rope (7) and following adjustment of rear PTO control:
tie-rod (13) rotating lever (10) for control of
distribution control valve (9), which is - set handle (1) and lever (10) of
intended for control of oil supplied to friction distributor (11) in neutral position;
gear and brake. - by changing length of steel rope
Handle (1) (figure on page 86a) has three rod(5) ( by screwing yoke up or down
positions: yoke (3) , having in advance released
- end front – “PTO switched on”; check nut (4) and tie-rod (13) (
- end rear – PTO end brake switched screwing it up or down the rod, having
on”; in advance released check nut (8),
- middle – “PTO and brake switched align openings in yoke (3) and lever
off”. (14) of switch (15), as well as in tie-
Distribution lever (10) is fixed in three rod (13) and lever (10) of distributor
positions with diesel in operation: upper – (11), bring them together with your
“PTO switched on”; lower – “brake switched fingers (2, 12) and fix with pin. After
on”, and middle (neutral) – “PTO and brake completing adjustments tighten check
switched off”. nuts (4) and (8).
Design version
1 – control handle; 2 – pin; 3 – yoke; 4 – check nut; 5 – steel rope rod; 6 – spring; 7 – steel rope; 8 –
check nut; 9 – distributor; 10 – lever; 11 – tap; 12 – pin; 13 – tie-rod; 14 – lever; 15 lever.
 Check operation of the control neutral handle (1) position. The control
mechanism. With force of maximum 30 N handle has two fixed positions: the end front –
(3 kgs) applied, handle (1) should move (PTO switched on), and end rear – “brake of
easily and with no jams , and be fixed PTO end switched on”.
accurately in three positions with diesel in
operation. With non-operational diesel it CAUTION! To engage PTO, smoothly push
should reset from end front position to the control handle with 2…4 s delay in the
neutral by means of spring (6). middle of shifting from neutral to PTO
In the hydraulic version of PTO control (see switch on.
illustrated design version below), instead of For the latter design version: (when shifting
distributor (9) a cock (11) with a damper ( in from rear position to PTO switch on) to
the form of pneumatic coupler that ensures avoid breakage of drive shaft, reduction gear
smoothness of PTO start) can be installed. pinions and PTO end.
The difference against described above design
lies in the absence of return spring (6) and
5.5.2 Possible rear PTO malfunctions
Table 5 – 5
Rear PTO doesn’t fully transfer torque, or keeps rotating after PTO brake is engaged
Control adjustment is violated Using distributor adjust control

Low oil pressure in the transmission Adjust reduction valve of transmission HS.
hydraulic system.
Low oil pressure at the outlet to friction gear Check pressure, if required, check sealing rings of
and PTO brake due to: the friction gear and PTO reduction gear brake, or
c) leakage in the distributor, friction gear replace distributor.
and PTO brake;
d) distributor main valve seizure Dismantle distributor, clean and rinse parts,
remove causes of seizure, replace damaged parts, if
necessary.
Violation of friction gear or brake operation Rinse friction gear and brake parts in pure diesel
due to pistons hang or wear-out of friction fuel, replace friction discs, if required.
discs
5.6. FRONT PTO (ONCE INSTALLED)
The front PTO (FPTO) is design for driving agricultural machinery, being mounted on front hinge
mechanism. It is independently driven with clock-wise rotation of the end, if looking at its end
face. It provides the end frequency rotation of 1000 rev/min at diesel rotation frequency of 1845
rev/min and power output of 44 kW (60 h/p) maximum.
FPTO (fig A) is driven by pulley (1) of diesel crankshaft and reduction gear (4) via distance piece
(2), permanently installed in pulley (1), and crankshaft (3).
1 – pulley; 2 – distance piece (spacer); 3 – crankshaft; 4 – FPTO reduction gear “A” – distance of
rod extension
In FPTO reduction gear (figure B, page 89) connected to turn roller (18) effecting levers
power is transferred from shaft (12) to end (1) (19) of belt brakes.
by means of shifted toothed clutch (11) Hydraulic cylinder (5) rod (see figure below)
installed on shaft (12), pinion (10), moves by changing oil flow direction in
intermediate pinion (24), pinion (17) mounted electric-hydraulic distributor (1).
on shaft (16), which is connected to crown Oil flow coming along forced pipelined (2) is
pinion (9) of the planetary reduction gear. directed either to pipeline (3) connected to rod
FPTO is unified with rear PTO planetary end head of cylinder (5) ( FPTO is switched
reduction gear of tractors MTZ-80. It is off – rod is drawn in), or to pipeline (4),
controlled by hydraulic cylinder (5), connected to piston end head of cylinder (5),
(FPTO is switched on – the rod is withdrawn).
1 - electric-hydraulic distributor; 2 – forced oil conduit; 3 - oil conduit of hydraulic cylinder rod
head end; 4 – oil conduit of hydraulic cylinder piston head end; 5 – hydraulic cylinder.
Control of front PTO (if installed)
1. With minimum stable diesel revolutions, - to switch FPTO off, press upper part of
engage FPTO drive; to this end turn lever key (20), signal lamp (21) goes out,
(22) (figure B, page 89), mounted on top which indicates that FPTO is switched
of reduction gear body, anti clockwise, off.
having released bolt (23) in advance. To CAUTION!
disengage the dive, turn lever (22)  When FPTO is not used, switch FPTO
clockwise. After switching is completed, drive off.
tighten bolt (23).  Before starting the diesel make sure that
2. Switching FPTO on and off is carried out key (20) and pushbutton (22) are in
in the following way (see figure below): position “FPTO is switched off”
- to switch FPTO on, press lower part of (indicating lamp (21) doesn’t light).
key (20), then push button (22) and  When the control system is deenergized
release it. After that indicating lamp (21) (generator out of order, belt breakage,
should light (yellow color), which means etc.), switch off the drive, as shown
that FPTO is switched on; above in item 1, to exclude before time
failures of FPTO reduction gear parts.
3. Switch FPTO with diesel idling, and only 5. When changing oil in the reduction gear,
after tractor acceleration increase diesel new oil should be refilled to control plug
rotation frequency to required value. level (13).
4. To replace end (1) (figure B, page 89), 6. Periodically check extension of control
switch off FPTO, stop the diesel , unscrew cylinder rod (size “A”, figure A, page 89).
six bolts (3), take out plate (2), pull out If in position “FPTO switched off” the rod
the end (1) and mount the required one, extends less then by 25 mm, or in position
having lubricated in advance centering “FPTO switched on” – more than 90 mm,
surface with thin layer of consistent replace lining of belt brakes (20, 21)
grease. Follow reverse order for assembly (figure B, page 89) of the planetary
operation. reduction gear.
5.7. FRONT DRIVE AXLE
1 – left finite reduction gear; 2 – king pin axle; 3 - front drive axle beam; 4 – two-rod hydraulic
cylinder of steering control; 5 – central reduction gear; 6 – central brake; 7 – axial spherical hinge; 8
– steering tie-rod; 9 – right finite reduction gear; 10 – arm.
The front drive axle is designed for torque to axle beam by means of king pin axles (2).
transfer from the diesel to driven drive front Central reduction gear body has two-rod
wheels. FDA consists of whole cast beam (3), hydraulic cylinder (4), coupled with steering
central reduction gear (5) with main gear and knuckles’ arms (10) by means of axial
differential fastened by bolts to FDA beam, spherical hinge (7) and tie-rod (8).
finite gears’ reduction gears (1, 9), connected
5.7.1. CENTRAL REDUCTION GEAR Tension of bearings (11, 24) and engagement
WITH FINAL DRIVE AND of final drive pinions (12, 25) are adjusted by
DIFFERENTIAL nuts (7, 19) with retaining plates (18) and
bolts (10).
Body of central reduction gear (6) is fastened
to FDA beam with bolts. The body houses
coned pinions (12, 25) of the final drive
increased friction self-locking differential,
consisting of half-axle pinions (23),
differential (15) cups, discs (16, 17), satellites
(21), satellites’ axles (20) installed in boxes
(13, 14) that are tightened with bolts (5). Self-
locking differential automatically unites both
half-axle shafts (9, 22) to function as one
assembly, when front wheels slip separately.
Under impact of axial forces cups squeeze
discs (16, 17), locking half-axle pinions to
differential boxes, resulting in differential
locking during straight movement. When
tractor is making a turn, outside forces exceed
friction in discs, which start to slip, and
differential unlocks.
Central disc brake comprises of disc (27),
fastened to flange (29) fixed by nut (28) to 1 – nut; 2, 4 – coned roller bearing; 3 –
splined end of the drive pinion of final drive distance sleeve; 5 – bolt; 6 – body; 7, 19 –
(25), and carriage (26), that is fastened to adjustment nut; 8 – control –refilling plug; 9,
central reduction gear body (6) with brake 22 – half-axle shaft; 10 – locking bolt; 11, 24
blocks, driven with hydrostatic drive, thus – coned roller bearing; 12 – driven pinion; 13,
ensuring braking of front wheels, when tractor 14 – differential box; 15 – cup; 16, 17 – discs;
is braked with linked pedals of working 18 – retaining plate; 20 – axle; 21 – satellite;
brakes. 23 – half-axle pinion; 25 – drive pinion; 26 –
Tension of bearings (2, 4) of the drive pinion carriage; 27 – brake disc; 28 – nut; 29 –
is adjusted by some grinding of distance flange; 30 – sealing ring.
sleeve (3) and tightening of nut (2) to required
torque.
5.7.2. FINAL DRIVE REDUCTION GEAR BOX
Planetary-cylindrical reduction gear is

designed for transfer and increase of torsion
movement from FDA differential at different
turning angles of front drive wheels.
Reduction gear consists of double hinge,
cylindrical and planetary gear, hinge pin and
levers for control of front wheels turn. Double
hinge (21) on one side is connected to FDA
differential by means of shaft (17), and from
the other side – to drive pinion (9) being in
engagement with driven pinion (27) of
cylindrical pinion. The drive pinion is set on
coned roller bearings (10). Toothed ring of
pinion (27) is in constant engagement with
sun pinion (2) of the planetary gear, which,
via satellites (4), axles (3), carrier (29) and
crown pinion (5) bring to rotation flange (30) 1, 25 – coned roller bearing; 2 – sun pinion; 3
of the front wheel. The flange is mounted in – axle; 4 – satellite; 5 – crown pinion; 6 –
coned roller bearings (1, 25), adjusted by nut breather; 7 – plate; 8 – plate; 9 – drive pinion;
(32). 10 – coned roller bearing; 11 – cup; 12 – oil
Pivot connection is formed by upper and cup; 13 – bolt; 14 – upper axle of king pin; 15
lower axles (14, 24), and coned roller – spacer; 16, 23 – coned roller bearing; 17 –
bearings (16, 23) installed in body bores (26) half-axle shaft; 18 – axle beam; 19 – yoke; 20
of steering knuckle and axle beam (18). – sealing ring; 21 – double hinge; 22 – spacer;
Tension of bearings (16, 23) is adjusted by 24 – lower axle of king pin; 26 – body; 27 –
spacers (15). pinion; 28 – drain plug; 29 – carrier; 30 –
Bearings clearance (10) of drive pinion is flange; 31 – nut; 32 – nut.
adjusted by spacers (22).
5.7.3. Drive of front drive axle
1 – pinion; 2 – piston; 3 – drum; 4 – jaw half-clutch; 5 – spring; 6 – shaft; 7 – spline bushing; 8 –

torsion bar; 9 – crankshaft yoke; 10 – clamp; 11 – shield; 12 - electric-hydraulic distributor; 13 –
pusher; 14 – switch; 15 – plug.
FDA drive is designed for transfer of torsion (1) freely rotates (with clutch disengaged). It
movement from gear box countershaft by is in permanent engagement with the pinion
means of driving pinion of synchronized of synchronized PTO drive; with clutch being
PTO, multi-disc friction hydraulically engaged, the pinion is connected by a set of
controlled clutch, torsion bar and crankshaft friction discs with drum (3) of hydraulically
to front drive axle. pressed clutch, discs are pressed by piston
Switching PTO drive on/off is carried out by (2)under oil pressure. The drum and jaw half-
means of hydraulically pressed clutch upon clutch (4) of the overrunning clutch are
sensor signal, which is effected by the installed on shaft splines (6), and splined joint
overrunning clutch depending on rear wheels allows the drum to rotate by 45 0 in relation to
slippage. the shaft. The half-clutch is constantly spring-
FDA drive is situated in GB case on the right loaded (5) to drum knuckles and can axially
of tractor travel; in this case torsion bar passes move and act on pusher (13) of automatic
through clutch body. Support of crankshaft drive switching sensor (item 7 of the figure
sliding yoke is installed in clutch body. on page 97). Torsion bar (8) connects shaft
The drive consists of the following main parts (6) by way of splined bushing (7) with
and assemblies. Shaft (6) is mounted in GB crankshaft sliding yoke.
case on roller bearings. On the shaft pinion
Operation of FDA drive the half-clutch moves pusher (13), switch (14)
closes electric circuit of the electric magnet of
With no slippage forward travel of the tractor, hydraulic distributor (10), oil under pressure
shaft (6) (figure on page 95), connected to is supplied to the clutch booster, moving
FDA wheels, has greater rotation frequency, piston (2). With this, a set of discs squeezes,
than pinion (1) and drum (3) rotate against blocking pinion (1) with drum (3), and
shaft. Drum (3) cams axially move the half- providing transfer of torque.
clutch along shaft splines, squeezing spring With forced FDA switching on, oil is supplied
(5). to the clutch booster irrespective of rear
With this, contacts of switch (14) of the drive wheels slippage. When FDA is switched off,
automatic switching on sensor are open and the distributor shuts off pressurized duct, and
hydraulic distributor electric magnet is from the clutch booster oil is forced to drain.
deenergized, and there is no pressure in the General arrangement and operation modes of
friction clutch booster. the FDA drive control system are described
When rear wheels slip and exceed the rated below. Diagnostics opening covered with
value, frequency of shaft (6) rotation drops to plug (15) is provided for checking pressure in
an extend for drum (3) to start rotating in the drive clutch booster. Switch (14) and
reverse direction and spring (5) resets half- electric-hydraulic distributor (12) are
clutch (4) to initial position. By its coned part protected with clamp (10) and shield (11).
5.7.2. The system of FDA drive control Automatic switching sensor (7) consists of
(see fig. on page 97) pusher (13), guide and switch (14), (page 95).
Key-type switch (15) for FDA drive control
The system includes panel (1), drive wheels and indicating lamp (14) of drive switched on
turn angle sensor (11), installed on the FDA state, are placed on panel (1).
right side, reverse sensor (5), installed on the Switch (15) has three positions:
right GB side, two sensors (13) of work - “Automatic FDA control” (upper fixed);
brakes switching on, sensor (7) of automatic - “ Forced FDA switching on” ( lower
FDA drive switching on, electric-hydraulic fixed);
distributor (8) installed on the GB cover right - “ FDA switched off” (middle fixed).
side, electrical cables (9), connector (4) and With switch (15) position “FDA switched
sockets (12). off”, power is not supplied to electric-
The system is supplied is similar to hydraulic distributor (8), FDA drive clutch is
described above rear axle DL system. connected to drain, and FDA drive is
switched off.
MTZ 2022/2022V Operation manual Section 5. Design and operation
The control system for rear axle differential locking (DL) and front drive axle (FDA) drive:
1 – control panel; 2 – a box of fuses; 3 – a box of starting relay; 4 – plug-and-socket; 5 – reverse
sensor; 6 – hydraulic distributor of DL control; 7 – sensor of automatic FDA drive switching on; 8
– hydraulic distributor for FDA drive control; 9 – connecting cables; 11 – sensor of drive wheels
turning angle (25 degrees); 12 – connectors; 13 – sensor of work brakes switched on state; 14, 16 –
indicator lamps; 15 – switch for control of FDA drive; 17 – switch of DL control; 18 – HLS
switch; 19 – sound alarm switch (2022V).
CAUTION!
With switch (15) in position “Automatic  when pressing interlocked brake
FDA control”, FDA drive automatically pedals, FDA drive switches on
switches on when travelling forward by irrespective of switch (15) position.
means of sensor (7), giving signal of  When travelling on hard surface roads,
switching on depending on slippage, to the be sure to SWITCH FDA OFF (
solenoid of electric-hydraulic distributor (8), middle position of key (15)) to avoid
which sends oil flow under pressure to FDA increased wear-out of front wheels’
drive clutch. FDA drive automatically tires and drive parts.
switches off when front wheels turn at a  When tractor operates in the reverse
certain angle in any direction. mode, use only forced FDA switching.
When switch (15) is set to position “Forced DO NOT switch FDA by force with
FDA switching on”, FDA drive is switched tractor movement speed over 15 km/h.
on by force both when travelling forward or
moving in reverse irrespective of front
wheels turning angles and slippage.
5.7.5. Adjustment of the switch of FDA drive automatic switching on sensor
Make adjustment of switch (5) after

assembling hydraulically loaded clutch and Position I (switched on)
cover (6) installation on transmission in the
following order:
1. Turn drum (1) and put it in position I ,
when cams of half-clutch (2) and drum
(1) are fully brought together, pusher (3)
is extended to its utmost position.
2. Put initial quantity (5 – 6 pieces) of
adjustment spacers (4) under switch end
face.
3. Removing adjustment spacers (4) one by
one, get such switch (5) position when
its contacts are closed.
4. Put half-clutch (2) to position II, when
cams of half-clutch (2) and drum (1) are
fully disengaged, and pusher (3) is sunk
in its utmost position.
5. Check contacts opening of switch (5) in
position II.
Position II (switched off)
The switch is thought to be properly
adjusted, if in position I its contacts are
closed, and in position II – open. Consult the
control lamp in making checks. Checks can
be made by indicating lamp on the control
panel, in this case key of FDA drive control
should be in upper position.
Note:
In position I, size A from pusher end face (3)
to switch (5) end face of less than 11.5 mm
is not allowable.
Violation of the requirement may lead to
switch (5) failure. 1 – drum; 2 – half –clutch; 3 – pusher; 4 –
spacer; 5 – switch; 6 – cover.
5.7.6. Possible FDA malfunctions
Table 5-6
Increased final drive noise
Abnormal backlash in drive pinion Address high-skilled specialist or dealer
bearings of final drive
Oil leakage on wheel reduction gear
Sealing rings of wheel flange or steering Replace sealing
knuckle are worn-out or damaged
Increased wear-out and separation of front wheel tires
Improper convergence adjustment Make adjustments
Non-compliance of tires’ air pressure with Adjust tires’ pressure according to
recommended rated values manufacturer’s recommendations
FDA constantly operates in the forced Observe directions laid out in the present manual
switched on mode
Driving clutch doesn’t transfer torque
No pressure in the clutch booster Disassembly the distributor, rinse the body and
slide valve
Electrical part of the system is faulty Find out and correct the trouble
Torque is not sufficiently transferred
Leakage in the hydraulic system of drive
control:
-wear-out of rubber sealing rings; Replace sealing rings.
- wear-out of piston and drum sealing Replace sealing rings
rings;
- wear-out of adjacent surfaces:
bearing race –drum bushing, drum-
piston;
- wear-out of a set of discs; Replace worn-out parts
- slippage of FDA drive clutch Adjust pressure in the transmission hydraulic
system (9…10 kgs/cm2)
Insufficient oil pressure in the Make adjustments
transmission hydraulic system
The drive doesn’t operate in the automatic mode
Switch of sensor automatic switching on Adjust the switch
is poorly adjusted
5.8. BRAKES
Tractors are equipped with left-side and right-side working brakes with
foot pedals control (5, 6) (see figure on page 104), and a parking brake
with hand independent mechanical control by means of handle (9)at left
operator’s hand, effecting working brakes (see figure on page 102).
Working brakes are driven hydraulically by means of left and right main wheel cylinders (7), left
and right working cylinders (9, 11), correspondingly (see figure on page 104). Brakes are
independently mechanically controlled by means of a handle via lever system.
Table 5-7
Brakes Brakes Brakes drive Brakes type Installation
control place
Working Foot operated Hydrostatic “Wet” disc Drive pinion
shafts of final
Parking Hand Mechanical, with drives
operated independent working
brakes drive
5.8.1 WORKING BRAKES
Left and right multi-disc “wet” brakes are system, rotating shaft (5), and its cam (14)
mounted on shafts of final drive driving acts on pushers (13); pressure clutch plates
pinions. Each brake consists of six friction (1, 9) rotate relatively each other and as a
discs (2) with metal-ceramic lining; five result of that balls (8) roll out of hollows and
intermediate discs (11, 12), two pressure spread pressure clutch plates. The whole set
clutch discs (1,9) brought together by four of discs (2, 11, 12) compresses and brakes
springs (17), six steel balls (8) placed in the shaft on which it is installed. Braking
drop-like hollows of pressure clutch plates; discs are lubricated and cooled by oil
two pushers (13) with springs (15), cam supplied from transmission lubricating
(14), shaft (5) mounted on two needle roller system through opening “A”. Assembly
bearings (4) with sealing ring (7); lever (6) clearance of 1.2…1.8 mm between discs is
and cover (3) with spacers, fastened to pipe provided by placement of required number
(10) by seven bolts. of spacers (18).
When pressing brake pedal, force is
transferred to lever (6) via hydraulic drive
1, 9 – pressure clutch plate; 2 – friction disc; 3 – cover; 4 – needle roller bearing; 5 – shaft; 6 –
lever; 7 – sealing ring; 8 – ball; 10 – pipe; 11, 12 – intermediate disc; 13 – pusher; 14 – cam; 15 –
spring; 16 – pin; 17 – spring; 18 – spacers (1…3 pieces); “A” – opening for oil conduit.
5.8.2 Parking brake
Main working brakes with independent drive of rear wheels are used as parking brakes.
1 – stop-plate; 2 – lever; 3 – tie-rod; 4 – adjustment bolt; 5 – draw-out mechanism; 6 – axle; 7 –

fixation pin; 8 – fixing lock; 9 – handle; 10 – brakes roller; 11, 20 – lever; 12 pin; 13, 16 – tie-rod;
14, 17 – brakes lever; 15 – right-hand main cylinder; 18 – left-hand main cylinder; 19 – pin.
The drive (see figure on page 102) consists of Pressure clutch plates, rotating towards each
the draw out mechanism (5) unified with the other, and with their contour grooves’ tilted
mechanism of tractor MTZ 1523, mounted on surfaces rolling on balls (8) expand, thus
axle (6), which is fastened to cabin left side squeezing sets of brakes discs (2, 11) and
off the operator’s seat, and mechanical braking final drives’ driving pinions.
transmission, comprising of lever (2), freely When turning handle (9) (see figure on page
set on brakes roller (10) with its hub, levers 102) with tie-rod (3) by 35…400 around its
(11 and 20) connected to the roller by way of axis, tie-rod toothed comb disengages fixing
keyed joints. lock (8), and tie0rod is free to go downwards,
To lever (2) plate (1) is welded, abutted by unbraking driving pinions of rear wheels’
adjusting bolt (4), screwed in left-side brake final drives.
lever (20).
Levers (11 and 20) via tie-rods (13 and 16) 5.8.3. Brakes hydraulic drive
are connected to two-arm levers (14 and 17), (see figure on page 104)
fastened to splined ends of left and right
brakes. Their lower arms are connected to Brakes hydraulic drive provides independent
main cylinders’ (15, 18) rods by means of control of main brakes using two pedals (5, 6)
yokes and pins. and consists of two wheel cylinders (7) with
When pulling tie-rod (3) using draw-out rods jointed to brake pedals; two wheel
mechanism handle (9), the effort is transferred cylinders (1 and 9), interconnected by
to lever (2), and from its stop (1) – to bolt (4), pipelines (3, 4, 10, 13) and hoses (11, 12)
thus rotating lever (2) and roller (10), with main cylinders (7). Wheel cylinders’
connected with it by means of key, lever (11), rods are joint coupled with levers (2, 8) of
tie-rods (13 and 16), brakes levers (14 and main brakes correspondingly.
17), moving pressure clutch plates (1, 9) of When pressing pedals the force via hydraulic
brakes ( see figure on page 101) via shaft (5), drive can be transferred to:
cam (14) and pushers (13). - left main brake – via lever (8);
- right main brake – via lever (2).
MTZ 2022/2022V –Operation manual Section 5. Design operation
Brakes hydraulic drive
1 – right-side wheel cylinder; 2 – right-side brake lever; 3,4,10,13 – pipelines; 5 – left-side brake
pedal; 6 – right-side brake pedal; 7 – wheel cylinders; 8 - right-side brake lever; 9 – left-side wheel
cylinder; 11, 12 – brakes flexible hoses
5.8.4. Brakes adjustment
A. Adjustment of main brakes of tractor MTZ 2022
CAUTION! To avoid injury make adjustment shorten or elongate rods of hydraulic

of main and parking brakes on horizontal cylinders (1,2) to obtain required free travel of
terrain and with diesel stopped. To exclude pedals.
accidental tractor movement place wedges 2.3. Tighten nuts (7), put pins (6) and secure
from behind and in front of rear wheels. them with a cotter-pin.
Make adjustment of tractor’s brakes in the Free pedals travel of 3…7 mm corresponds to
following order: clearance between piston and pusher of each
1. Using stop adjustment bolts (8) and wheel cylinder equal to 0.6 –1.3 mm.
screwing them in to the depth of 20 +/- 3 2.4. Pedals should not touch cabin elements.
mm, align pedal pads (8,9). Tighten nuts Height of pedal pads, if necessary, should be
(4). Pedals must be locked with a bar. adjusted by bolts (5) and length of hydraulic
2. Adjust free travel of pedals (8,9) within cylinders’ rods, providing free pedals travel of
3…7 mm, having fulfilled the following 3…7 mm.
operations:
2.1 unlock and take off pins (6), disconnect *) Adjustment can be made without
yokes (3) from pedals’ rods (8, 9). disconnecting yoke from pedals by rotating
cylinders’ rods with check nut released.
2.2. Unscrew check nuts (7) by several turns
and by screwing yokes (3) up or down,
3. Set rod (1) length of the left brake (8) with yoke (4), correspondingly, with
hydraulic booster to 120 mm, if measured piston fully drawn in, and pin (3) must
between where hydraulic booster abuts touch yoke slot from hydraulic cylinder
piston and axis of pin connecting lever (5) side.
Make adjustment using yoke (4), and carry out the following operations:
 unscrew check nut (2) by several turns.
 Remove a cotter pin and take off pin (3), having disconnected yoke (4) from lever (5).
 Screwing yoke (4) up or down the rod of hydraulic booster (8), set dimension to 120 +/- 1 mm.
 Tighten check nut (2), put and secure pin (3) with a cotter pin.
 Similarly adjust length of hydraulic booster rod of the right brake.
4. Fill in the drive hydraulic system with braking fluid and run through the hydraulic system in the
following sequence:
 fill in tanks (12, 13) of wheel cylinders (10, 11) with braking fluid up to marks “max” ( up to
level 15 +/- 5 mm from the tank top. In the process of running through control fluid level and
don’t allow its drop below mark “min”.
 Remove protective cups (9) off by-pass valves of main brakes’ hydraulic boosters, put pipes on
valves’ heads, submerging free end of pipes in reservoirs with 0.5 l minimum capacity and half-
filled with liquid fluid.
 Interlock pedals (14, 15) with locking bar “A”.
 Unscrew wheel cylinders valves by ½…3/4 turns, and after that press interlocked brake pedals
several times. PRESS FAST, RELEASE SMOOTHLY!
Keep on pressing (bleeding air from the brakes) at least 10 times, until air bulbs from pipes
submerged in fluid, stop coming.
 Keeping pedals pressed, tighten by-pass valves of both hydraulic boosters, and then release
pedals.
 Press interlocked brake pedals 4…5 times and, keeping them pressed, unscrew valve of the left
hydraulic booster, and after full pedal travel, when part of fluid with air withdraws from the
system, screw the valve up. Repeat the operation several times until air completely withdraws
from the system.
 Repeat bleeding air operation in the same sequence for the right brake hydraulic drive.
 To bleed hydraulic drive of FDA brakes, remove protective cup from air outlet valve (5) (see
figure on page 104) of FDA brake and put a pipe on the valve head, having submerged free pipe
end into braking fluid reservoir. Unscrew valve by ½…3/4 turns and bleed the system with
pedals interlocked, as described above.
 Add fluid to both tanks (12, 13) up to mark “max” (10…20 mm from tank top), remove pipes
from valves and put protective cups in place.
Check full travel of each unlocked pedal at force of 300N, which should be within 100-120 mm.
If full travel value exceeds the above-mentioned limits, make adjustments fulfilling the following
operations:
- loosen check nut (2) of hydraulic booster rod;
- screw yoke (4) up or down the rod of the left or right hydraulic booster;
- secure yokes with check nuts.
Check efficiency of brakes operation during tractor movement on dry hard surface road with
clutch disengaged. After pressing interlocked brake pedals with effort 590…600 N, with tractor
travel speed of 20 km/h, braking distance should not exceed 6.4. Difference of the beginning of rear
wheels braking should not be more than 0.5 m, as estimated by imprint with straight movement
direction. If necessary, adjust synchronism of braking start by changing length of the hydraulic
booster rod, screwing yoke (4) up or down the hydraulic booster rod.
If the thread is too small to make adjustment of pedal required travel, do the following for normal
brakes functioning:
- loosen coupling bolt of lever (5);

- disconnect both arms of lever (5) from yokes (4, 7);
- rearrange lever in slots of brake shaft (6);
- connect yokes to the lever, tighten the bolt and repeat adjusting operations.
3. Set wheel cylinder (8) length of the left fully inside. Pin (4) travel when force
brake to within 205…213 mm, if measured 350…400 N is applied to lever (5), on arm of
from cylinder end face to pin (4) axis, 60 mm, should be within 10…12 mm.
connecting lever (5) to yoke (3), with piston
Make adjustment by means of yoke (3), doing 4. Fill drive hydraulic system in with braking
the following operations: fluid “Neva-M”, and bleed the hydraulic
 disconnect tie-rod (7) of the parking brake system observing the following sequence:
drive from lever (5);
 unscrew check nut (2) on the cylinder rod  Fill-in tanks of wheel cylinders (1) and (2)
by several turns; (see figure on page 106) with braking
 rotating wheel cylinder rod (1) by flats, fluid “Neva_M” to marks “MAX” ( or to
adjust cylinder length and travel of wheel level 15 +/- 5 mm from tanks top). In the
cylinder yoke pin to required limits; process of bleeding watch the fluid level,
 tighten check nut (2), connect tie-rod (7) not allowing it drop below mark “MIN”;
of the parking brake drive.  Take protective cup off stop valve (9) of
left brake wheel cylinder (8), put a pipe on
If adjustment of required dimensions proves the valve head, having submerged free
to be impossible, dismount lever (5) from pipe end in a reservoir with at least 0.5 l
brake shaft (6), having before loosened capacity, filled by half with braking fluid;
tension of the bolt of lever (5) hub, and install  Interlock pedals (8, 9) with a locking bar;
it back , having rotated by one slot in the  Unscrew stop valve (9) by ½…3/4 turns,
required direction ( rotation by one slot and after that press interlocked braking
changes dimensions by 8 mm). pedals several times. PRESS FAST,
Similarly, adjust dimensions of the right brake RELEASE SMOOTHLY!
cylinder.
Keep pressing the pedal for at least 10 times, Difference of the beginning of rear wheels
before air bulbs stop coming out of the pipe, braking should not be more than 0.5 m, if
submerged in fluid; estimated by imprint with straight movement.
 keep pedals pressed, tighten stop valve of If necessary, adjust synchronism of braking
the left wheel cylinder and release pedals; by changing length of wheel cylinder rod,
 press interlocked braking pedals 4…5 screwing yoke (3) up or down the wheel
times and, keeping them pressed, unscrew cylinder rod.
stop valve of the left wheel cylinder, and If the thread on the rod is not sufficient to
after full pedal travel, when part of fluid make adjustment of the required pedal travel,
and air will withdraw from the system, do the following operations for normal brakes
tighten the valve; functioning:
 following the same procedure, bleed  loosen coupling bolt of lever (5);
hydraulic drive of the right brake;  disconnect both arms of lever (5) from
 fill- fluid in both tanks to mark “MAX” yokes (3, 7);
(or 10…20 mm from tank top), put  rearrange lever in braking shaft slots (6);
protective cups in place.  connect yokes to the lever, tighten the bolt
and repeat adjusting operations.
Check full travel of each unlocked pedal
individually with force 300 N , which should
be within 100-120 mm. If the value of pedals’
full travel goes beyond the above-mentioned
limits, make adjustment by carrying out the
- loosen check nut (2) of the wheel
cylinder rod;
- screw yoke (3) up or down the rod of the
left or right wheel cylinders;
- secure yokes with check nuts.
Check efficiency of brakes operation during

tractor movement on dry hard surface road,
with clutch disengaged. When pressing
interlocked brake pedals with force 590-600
N, the braking distance at tractor movement
speed of 20 km/h should not exceed 6.4 m.
B. Adjustment of parking brake drive
Make adjustment of parking brake drive with 3. All pins should easily rotate in couplings
handle (13) travel of 120 mm maximum. “yoke – lever head”, and move along yoke
Before adjustment of the parking brake, make slots without jams.
adjustment of the main brake. 4. Make final adjustments of hand
Observe the following sequence to adjust mechanical control of braking start
control of mechanical brakes drive (parking synchronism (by imprint of tires’ tread on
brakes): dry asphalt) on assembled tractor during
1. push handle (13) with tie-rod (4) to the movement, with brakes tension by means
end low position. The fixing pin (12) of the lever with force of 400 N.
should be in the arm slot. If required, correct the adjustment by
2. Adjust length of left brake tie-rod (15) changing length of tie-rods (9) and (15).
within (75 +/- 2) mm , right brake tie-rod
(9) – (78 +/-) mm in such a way, that pin NOTICE! When adjusting length of
(8) of the right brake touched oval yoke tie-rod, don’t allow length of threaded
slot, and pin of the left brake had tie-rod section in the yoke to be less
clearance of (3…4) mm, with brake than 12 mm. Torque tie-rod yokes’
handle in the end lower position. check nuts to 40…45 Nm.
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual Design and operation
C. Adjustment of main brakes of tractor MTZ 2022V in the reverse mode
IMPORTANT! Make brakes

adjustment only after checking and
adjusting forward travel main and
parking brakes
Observe the following sequence to adjust

brakes with reversible control post:
1. Check and, if necessary, adjust size 20 +/-

2 mm, by screwing down stop bolt (9) to
the given depth. After adjustment of stop
bolt (9), secure nut (8).
2. Adjust free travel of pedal (1) within
6…12 mm, which corresponds to
clearance of 1…2 mm between pusher (4)
of wheel cylinder (3) and piston (2). For
adjustment do the following operations:
 Take off a cotter pin and remove pin (7).
 Take off protective sheath (10) and
unscrew check nut (5) by several turns.
 Screwing yoke (6) up or down pusher (4),
set free pedal travel (1) to within given
above limits. Full pedal travel should be
90 – 110 mm.
 Secure nut (5), cotter-pin pin (7) , and put
the sheath in place.
1 – pedal of the reversible main break; 2 –
piston; 3 – wheel cylinder of the reversible
post; 4 – pusher; 5 – check nut; 6 – yoke; 7 –
pin; 8 – check nut; 9 – adjustment stop bolt;
10 – sheath.
3. Set preliminary length of wheel cylinder by screwing yoke (5) up or down rod (3) of
reversing gear (1) to within 204…206 mm, cylinder (1), having in advance unscrewed
and adjust it in a way to provide free coupling check nut (4). After completing adjustment
of yoke (5) with lever (6), with wheel cylinder secure the nut with a cotter-pin.
rod (3) fully pushed inside. Make adjustment
4 Fill in the drive hydraulic system with

braking fluid “Neva-M” and bleed it by Repeat these operations until air bulbs stop
doing the following operations: getting out of the pipe submerged into fluid.
4.1 Remove protective sheath (10) (see figure
on page 110), and fill expansion chamber 4.4 Keeping pedal pressed, tighten stop valve
of wheel cylinder (3) with braking fluid to (2), then release the pedal, take pipe off
level 10…15 mm from chamber upper the valve and put the cup in place.
rim. 4.5 Check and, if necessary, add braking fluid
4.2 Remove rubber cup off stop valve (2) of to the expansion chamber up to the
wheel cylinder (1). Put hose on the valve required level. Put sheath (10) in place of
head, submerging its free end into 0.5 l wheel cylinder (3).
capacity glass reservoir, half filled with 5. Check synchronism of rear wheels
braking fluid. braking start during movement. When
4.3 Unscrew valve (2) of wheel cylinder by braking starts asynchronous, make
1/2…3/4 turn and press brake pedal adjustment of length of rod (8) of wheel
several times. PRESS PEDAL FAST, cylinder of the left or right brake by
RELEASE SMOOTHLY! means of yoke (7).
5.8.5. Possible brakes malfunctions

Table 5-8
Low braking efficiency
Increased travel of pedals Make adjustment, as shown in section

“Adjustments”
Air entrapped in the hydraulic drive Add fluid to mark “Max”. Bleed the hydraulic drive
system due to braking fluid level drop system.
below mark “Min” in wheel cylinders’
tanks
Loss of pressure in end head cavities of Replace sealing rings. Bleed the system.
wheel cylinders due to damage of sealing
rings.
Leakage of braking fluid through pipeline Tighten coupling nuts, clamps, replace damaged
couplings, hoses in broken places parts. Add fluid to the required level. If necessary,
bleed the system.
Brakes do not release
No free pedals travel. Make adjustments
Jamming of pistons of wheel and master
cylinders and hydraulic boosters due to:
 soiling and corrosion of working Replace protective sheathes. Clean cylinders , rinse,
surfaces; remove rust. Replace sealing rings
 swelling of sealing rings due to Rinse the system. Replace sealing rings.
mineral oil entrapping.
Not full return of pedals to initial position
after braking:
 loosening or breakage of pedals’ Replace springs.
return springs, wheel cylinders,
pressure clutch plates
Jamming of brakes control lever on the Take the lever off the roller, clean seat on the roller,
brakes’ roller. grease and install it in place.
One of main brakes doesn’t release
Loosening or breakage of return springs of Replace them.
pressure clutch plates.
No synchronism in braking of the right and left wheels
Wear-out of disc friction surfaces of one Replace discs
of brakes.
Main brakes are not properly adjusted. Make adjustment.
5.9. PNEUMATIC DRIVE OF TRAILER’S BRAKES
Pneumatic drive provides control of brakes as tires inflation. See pneumatic drive
for trailers and agricultural machines, diagram below.
equipped with pneumatic brakes drive, as well
1 – compressor; 2 – main pipe-line from inlet diesel collector; 3 – pressure regulator; 4 – air intake
valve; 5 – braking valve; 6 – control manifold; 7 – connecting head; 8 – air pressure indicator; 9 –
emergency pressure signal lamp; 10 – pressure sensor; 11 – emergency pressure sensor; 12 –
cylinder; 13 – condensate removal valve.
Air intake into compressor (1) is effected

from inlet diesel collector via manifold (2). In Pressure regulator (3) has air bleed-off valve
compressor (1) air is compressed and via (4) used for tires inflation.
pressure regulator (3) is sent to cylinder (12), Air pressure in cylinder (12) is controlled by
from which air under required pressure is pressure indicator (8) with signal lamp (9)
supplied to brake valve (5). With brake pedals (red color) of air emergency pressure in
not pressed, air via brake valve (5) and combination with pressure sensors (10) and
control main pipeline (6) is supplied to emergency pressure sensors (11).
coupling head (7) and further on to pneumatic
drive of trailer’s brakes.
Valve (13) is provided for condensate

removal from cylinder (12).
Connecting head (7) is of valve type. The

valve prevents compressed air outlet when the
pneumatic drive is used without a trailer (for
tires inflation).
Trailers’ brakes are controlled in two modes:
direct and automatic. Direct control is
effected by reducing pressure in the control
main pipe-line (6) during tractor braking. In
this case supply of compressed air to trailers’
pneumatic system ceases.
Trailer’s brakes are automatically engaged
in case of emergency disconnection of a
trailer from tractor due to pressure drop to
zero level in trailer’s coupling manifolds.
IMPORTANT! Before connecting or

disconnecting pneumatic main pipe-lines of
a tractor and trailer, engage the parking
brake.
5.9.1 Check and adjustment of the brake valve of the pneumatic system and its drive
Make adjustments with free position of tractor

brakes’ controls.
1. Connect pressure gage with scale at least
10 kgs/cm2 (1000 kPa) to the coupling
head of tractor’s pneumatic drive.
2. Switch the compressor on and fill cylinder
with air to pressure of 770-800 kPa
according to indicator on the instrument
panel.
3. Air pressure as indicated by pressure
gauge, connected to the coupling head,
should be not less than 770 kPa. If it is
below the mentioned value, perform the
following adjustment operations:
4. Check length of tie-rod (5) with built-in
compensator in assembly. The tie-rod
length should provide free (with no
tension) connection to lever (8) by means
of pin (7). If necessary, adjust length by
rotating yoke (6).
If air pressure according to pressure gauge
connected to the coupling head, doesn’t 1 – brake valve; 2 – check nut; 3 – jacket; 4 –
reach required value, perform the eyelet; 5 - tie-rod; 6 – yoke; 7 – pin; 8 – lever.
following operations: 8 – Put on jacket (3) and connect tie-rod (5) to
5. Disconnect tie-rod (5) from eyelet (4) and eyelet (4).
take rubber sheath (3) off brake valve (1)
to get access to check nut (2). IMPORTANT! When brake valve and its
6. Unscrew eyelet (3) by 2…3 turns and by drive are properly adjusted, pressure as
unscrewing check nut (2) set air pressure indicated by the pressure gauge, connected
to 770 kPa minimum. to the coupling head, should drop to zero
7. Screw eyelet (4) in check nut (2) to the with full movement of interlocked brake
end and secure the eyelet with a check pedals, as well as with parking brake
nut. engaged.
5.9.2 Check and adjustment of pressure regulator
With abnormal operation of pressure

regulator, as well as after its disassembly for
rinsing, lubrication or replacement of worn-
out parts, make adjustment in the following
sequence:
 Connect to the cylinder a pressure gauge
with scale factor of 10…20 kPa and scale
for at least 1600 kPa.
 Remove cup (1);
 Using a wrench screw cover (2) to the
body end;
 Start the diesel and compressor, and
pressurize the cylinder until safety valve
(6) operates under pressure 850…1000
kPa. If valve (6) operates under pressure
beyond given limits, make adjustments by
means of screw (8), having loosened
check nut (7) in advance;
 By slowly unscrewing cover (2), adjust
springs’ (3, 4) force, so that air pressure in
the cylinder, at which relief valve (5)
opens, was 770-800 kPa;
 Mark cover (2) position with paint on
threaded body part, and put cup (1) in 1 – cup; 2 – cover; 3 – outside spring; 4 –
place; inside spring; 5 – relief valve; 6 – safety
 Half open cylinder condensate relief valve; 7 – check nut; 8 – adjustment screw.
valve, and reduce air pressure in cylinder
to 700…650 kPa. At such pressure values
relief valve (5) should close and switch
compressor over to filling the cylinder
with air;
 Disconnect the pressure gauge from the
cylinder.
5.9.3. Possible malfunctions of the pneumatic system and trouble-shooting methods
Table 5-9
Slow pressure rise in the cylinder
Air leakage from the pneumatic system:
 nuts of pipe-lines, fittings, and Find out leakage sites and eliminate them by
fastening clamps are not properly tightening couplings or replacing damaged
tightened or damaged; parts.
 rubber sealing of the coupling head is Replace damaged sealing.
damaged;
 tension of sealing ring nut of the Tighten the nut.
coupling head got loose;
 mud got trapped under the coupling Clean the valve.
head valve;
 dust-proof cover is in touch with valve Correct the problem.
spindle of the coupling head;
 valve elements are deformed:
diaphragm torn, fastening of cover in Check the state of valve elements and replace
the brake valve got loose; them, if required; tighten fastening.
Make adjustment.
 valve drive adjustment disturbed;
 operation of pressure regulator is
Remove and send for repair.
disturbed;
Rinse the filter.
 filter is clogged.
Slow pressure rise in the compressor

Air leakage via compressor valves. Take off compressor head, clean valves and
seats of coke sediments.
Hang up or wear of compressor piston Remove head and cylinder of the compressor,
rings. clean rings of coke sediments and replace them,
if required
Pressure in the cylinder drops fast after diesel stop
Air leakage along pneumatic system Remove leakage.

coupling elements.

Pressure in the cylinder drops fast upon pressing brake pedals
The inlet valve is skewed, clogged or Remove skewness, clean or replace the valve.
damaged.
Brake valve diaphragm is damaged. Replace the diaphragm.
Insufficient pressure in the cylinder
Air leakage. Eliminate air leakage.
Operation of pressure regulator is disturbed. Adjust pressure regulator.
Draw-in or forced compressor valves are
faulty. Clean valves of coke sediments, and replace valves,
Great wear or damage of compressor piston if considerably worn-out.
rings. Clean piston rings of coke sediments, or replace
them.
Compressor injects too much oil in the pneumatic system
Damage or wear of compressor piston rings. Clean piston rings of coke sediments, or replace
them.
Pressure regulator switches on compressor during the idle run with pressure less than
0.77…0.80 mPa (770…800 kPa), and during working stroke – with less than 0.65 Mpa (650
kPa), or more than 0.70 MPa ( 700 Kpa)
Soiling of cavities and ducts of pressure Rinse and clean.
regulator.
Adjustment cover is unlocked. Make adjustment of compressor pressure switching
on/off.
Loss of elasticity , damage or destruction of Replace damaged parts.
rubber parts, shrinkage of springs.
Skewness of adjusting regulator section. Check valves mobility, grease, if necessary.

Pressure regulator often starts (switches the compressor on) without air intake from the
cylinder
Air leakage from the pneumatic system or Establish and remove air leakage.
pressure regulator, damage of regulator
check valve.
The end of table 5-9

Regulator functions in the mode of a safety valve
Adjustment cover is too deeply screwed in. Adjust the regulator (see page 117).
Seizure of balance piston of the diaphragm
assembly. Dismantle pressure regulator and correct
seizure.
No clearance between balance valve and
lower cover, outlet cover openings are Unscrew the cover, clean outlet openings and
clogged. check for clearance.
No air is supplied to connecting hose via air bleed-off valve
The rod of air bleed-off valve in the Thread connecting hose nut on the coupling.
pressure regulator is not sufficiently
recessed.
Pressure regulator has switched the Reduce pressure in the receiver to below 0.65
compressor over into the idle run. MPa (650 kPa).
Displacement of the rubber ring on air Unscrew the cover, check position and state of
bleed-off valve. the rubber ring.
Inefficient operation of trailer’s brakes
Brake cock doesn’t provide pressure Adjust brake valve and its drive (see page
0.77…0.80 Mpa (770…800 kPa). 116).
Brake valve doesn’t provide pressure drop Adjust the brake valve and its drive (see page
to zero in the main connecting pipe-line. 116).
Operation of trailer’s braking system is
disturbed. Adjust it.
Slow release of trailer’s brakes
Adjustment of brake valve and its drive is Make adjustments (see page 116).
disturbed.
Operation of trailer’s braking system is Make adjustments.
disturbed.
5.10 HYDRAULIC STEERING
Hydraulic steering (HTDS) is intended for cylinder (see figure on page 124), that effect
steering of drive wheels’ turn, reducing tractor turn, oil supply pump (11) driven by
steering wheel force during tractor turn. It diesel and hydraulic fittings. Oil tank (1) of 6
consists of metering pump (6), two hydraulic l capacity serves as oil reservoir. It has paper
cylinders (12, 15), or one two-rod hydraulic oil filter with 25 mkm fine filtration.
1- oil tank; 2 – draw-in oil conduit; 3 – hose, 4 – drain hose; 5 – hose; 6 – metering pump; 7, 8, 9 –
high-pressure hoses, 10 – forced oil conduit; 11 – supply pump; 12 – left-side hydraulic cylinder;
13, 14 – high-pressure hose; 15 – right-side hydraulic cylinder; 16 – front drive axle; 17 – steering
oil drive.
MTZ 2022/2022V- Operation manual Section 5. Design and operation
5.10.1. Design and operation of HTDS 5.10.2. HTDS of the reversible tractor
MTZ 2022V
Metering pump (6) is mounted on the steering Design of HTDS requires no rearrangement
column arm, turn hydraulic cylinders are of HTDS system pipe-lines
installed on arms in front of FDA ( or one when shifting from forward movement to
two-rod turn hydraulic cylinder is built-in reverse mode, and visa versa.
reduction gear body behind FDA beam). Oil To steer the turn when operating in the
supply pump (11)is installed on the diesel. reverse mode, the rear cabin wall bears
The metering pump is connected to cavities of auxiliary steering column with a metering
turn hydraulic cylinders by means of hoses (7, pump, connected to four high-pressure hoses,
8), oil conduits (17) and hoses (13, 14); by to be connected to cavities of turn hydraulic
means of hoses (4, 5) – to oil tank (1); by way cylinder, supply pump and forced main pipe-
of oil conduit (10) and hoses (9) – to supply line of front travel metering pump. To
pump. During straight forward movement rearrange steering wheel (1) from forward
cylinder cavities are closed by belts of travel to reverse movement mode, remove
metering pump control valve, and oil from the cover (3), unscrew clamp (2), reinstall the
supply pump comes to the metering pump and wheel on auxiliary steering column, and
returns back to oil tank. When steering wheel adjust the position, as shown in section 4
is rotated, main valve of the metering pump (page 40).
shifts, providing oil supply to turn hydraulic
cylinder cavities in the amount proportional to
angle of steering wheel rotation.
5.10.3. Metering pump
The metering pump (see figure below) (7), safety valve (6) and two vacuum-resistant
consists of rocking unit I, distributor II, valves (8).
check valve (9), two shock-resistant valves
1 – stator, 2 – rotor; 3 – main valve; 4 – driven shaft; 5 – sleeve; 6 –safety valve; 7 – shock-
resistance valves; ; 8 – vacuum-resistant valves; 9 – check-valve; 10 – body; I – rocking assembly;
II- distributor.
Rocking assembly I consists of stator (1) Shock-resistant valves (7) limit pressure in
fixed to body (10), and rotating rotor (2), cylinders’ main pipe-lines during shock loads.
coupled to main valve (3) via driven shaft (4). Pressure in shock-resistant valves is adjusted
Distributor II consists of body (10), sleeve (5) to 22.5…24.5 Mpa (225…245 kgs/cm2).
and main valve (3), connected by slots to the Vacuum-resistant valves (8) ensure required
end of steering column driven shaft. supply of working fluid to the hydraulic
Safety valve (6) limits maximum pressure in cylinder in the emergency mode and during
the forced main pipe-line to within operation of shock-resistant valves.
17.7…18.0 Mpa (175…180 kgs/cm ). 2
5.10.4. Hydraulic cylinder of steering control
Two piston hydraulic cylinders (12, 15) (see of hydraulic cylinders’ bodies and rods’
figure on page 121) provide tractor’s drive heads.
wheels turn and are mounted in front FDA. The tractor may be equipped with two-rod
Rods of the hydraulic cylinder are connected steering hydraulic cylinder, built-in the
to FDA steering knuckles via coned pins, and reduction gear body behind FDA beam (see
hydraulic cylinders’ bodies are connected to figure below). Piston rods (5, 8) act on
arms on the FDA body. steering knuckles’ arms (91, 12) via coaxial
Spherical joints with grease cups used for joints (4, 9), tie-rods (3, 10) tie-rods’ and tie-
periodic joints greasing are installed in eyelets rods’ joints (2, 11).
1, 12 – steering knuckle arm; 2, 11 – tie-rod joint; 3, 10 – tie-rod; 4, 9 – spherical coaxial joint; two-
rod hydraulic cylinder; 5, 8 – rod; 7 – piston.
Oil tank of HTDS
The oil tank of the welded structure has 6 l

capacity and is fixed to gear box body. It
houses drain filter (2) with replaceable paper
filtering element of 25 mkm fine filtration.
Oil is filled via neck with plug (3). The oil
filter has safety valve (5). Oil level is
controlled by means of oil measuring rod (4).
Drain plug is intended for oil drain (1).
5.10.5. Possible malfunctions of hydraulic steering and correction methods

Table 5-10
Increased steering wheel force
No or insufficient pressure in the steering Rated steering wheel hydraulic system pressure
wheel hydraulic system due to: – 140…155 kgs/cm2 (at pedal stop).
 insufficient oil pressure in tank; supply Fill the tank with oil to the required level and
pump doesn't develop required pressure; bleed the hydraulic system to remove air.
 safety valve of the metering pump hangs
up in the open position , or is adjusted to Rinse safety valve and adjust to pressure
low pressure; 140…155 kgs/cm2 with rated diesel revolutions.
 considerable friction or jamming in Find out and remove causes hampering free
mechanical steering column elements; travel in mechanical elements of the steering
 air ingress in the draw-in main pipe-line column.
system. Check the draw-in main pipe-line, remove
leakage. Bleed the system to remove air.
Steering wheel rotates without driven wheels turning
Insufficient oil level in the oil tank. Fill the tank with oil to the required level and
bleed the hydraulic system to remove air.
Hydraulic cylinder piston sealing is worn out. Replace sealing or the hydraulic cylinder.
Increased initial effort at the beginning of steering wheel rotation
Increased oil viscosity (oil is cold) Heat up oil with diesel in operation
The steering wheel doesn’t return back to “neutral”, “motoring” of the metering pump
Increased friction or jamming of mechanical Remove causes of friction and jamming.
steering wheel elements.
Splined end of the steering column and Release cardan shaft.
metering pump are misaligned (outward To increase clearance put additional 1.5 mm
thrust of cardan shaft). maximum thick washers between metering pump
and steering wheel arm.
Completion of table 5-10

Increased steering wheel backlash
Coned pins of hydraulic cylinders or tie- Torque pins’ nuts to 12…14 kgs.m and secure
rods are not tightened. with cotter- pins.
Increased backlash of splined coupling Replace lower yoke of the cardan shaft.
“steering cardan shaft – metering pump”
Different minimum radii of tractor right-left turns
Wheels convergence is not adjusted Adjust wheels convergence
Turning angle of drive wheels is not complete
Too low pressure in the steering hydraulic Adjust pressure to within 140-155 kgs/cm2
system (14…15.5 Mpa).
Gear-type supply pump is faulty. Repair or replace the pump.
MTZ 2022/2022V-Operation manual Section 5. Design and operation
5.11. CHASSIS. TRACTOR WHEELS
Tractor’s drive rear wheels are installed in Inserts are tightened in the hub body by bolts
hubs which consist of cut coned inserts (3,4) (1) (M20).
and body (2).
1 – tightening bolts; 2 – hub body; 3 – upper insert; 4 – lower insert; 5 – dismantling openings.
5.11.1. Changing tractor wheelspan
Tractor wheel span for front wheels may be Front wheels span is set according to disc
changed within 1640-2190 mm, and for rear location relative to hub and rim.
wheels – from 1800 to 2500 mm (tires Diagram of span setting and sizes are given
580/70R38). below
(tires 420/70R24)
_________________________
*) as dispatched from the works
Rear wheels span is set by moving the hub

with a wheel along the half-axle, and
rearranging wheels from one side to another.
To change the wheel span, do the following:
1. Place tractor on even terrain.
2. Clean half-axle.
2- Jack up corresponding half-axle hose.
3 -Unscrew coupling bolts (1) (see figure on
page 127) from each insert (3, 4), and
using four of them for releasing inserts by
having screwed them in dismantling
threaded openings (5). The remaining two
bolts should be released by three full turns
each.
For dismantling, screw bolts in smoothly
until an insert is released*. CAUTION! After tightening bolts, check
4 Move the hub to the required span (use that inserts’ end faces extended relative each
table 5-11 for wheel span setting by other by not more than 1…2 mm.
changing size “K” between half-axle end 7 Adjust another wheel span.
face and insert end face). 8 Check and tighten coupling bolts after 3-
5 Screw in coupling bolts, using them for 10 hours of operation.
inserts tightening.
6 Torque bolts to 350…450 Nm (35…45 If double rear wheels need to be installed, use
kgs.m) in several attempts until all bolts special distance pieces (see section 7
are properly torqued. “ganging up").
If during changing rear wheels span, wheels
were removed to install them back torque
coupling nuts to 200…250 N.m (20…25
kgs.m).
Tire standard Wheel position Span size “L”, Mounting dimension** of the hug K to half-
size mm axle end face, mm
580/70R38 A 1800…2110 155…0
B 2230…2500 245…110
20,8R38 A 1800…2070 135…0
B 2230…2500 245…110
_____________________________________
* If inserts are impossible to extend using dismantling bolts, pour kerosine in inserts seats, wait for some
time, and then screw in dismantling bolts tapping the hub body until inserts fully extend.
** Changing wheel span by value K corresponds to changing hub position by value K/2 on each side
MTZ 2022/2022V-Operation manual Section 5. Design and operation
5.12. HYDRAULIC MOUNTING SYSTEM (HMS)
The system is designed for connecting to the operation of all hydraulically driven tools of
tractor mounted and semi-mounted machines, all machinery being ganged up to the tractor
control over their operation, as well as
.
5.12.1. Hydraulic system
The hydraulic system operates the mounting installed on the upper surface of the clutch
mechanism, as well as hydraulically driven body, gear-type oil pump (15) and drive (16),
tools of agricultural machinery ganged up to mounted on the left side of the clutch body,
the tractor. It allows to use height, power, main valve-valve regulator BOSCH (5),
positional or mixed regime of adjusting depth hydraulic distributor BOSCH (4), external
of travel of agricultural machinery tools. hydraulic cylinders control and RMD two
The mounted device is operated by way of hydraulic cylinders (7) (TS 90- x 250), drain
electromagnetic control, which provides oil filter (11)fastened to rear axle upper cover.
power, positional and mixed adjustment Hydraulic devices are interconnected by
method when operating mounted and semi- means of low-pressure main pipe-lines (10,
mounted tools. The hydraulic system (see 12), oil ducts and high-pressure hoses (6, 8, 9,
diagram below) includes welded oil tank (2), 13).
1 – oil filling neck plug; 2 – oil tank; 3 – oil level indicator; 9 – high-pressure oil conduct; 4 –
distributor BOSCH for external hydraulic cylinders control; 6, 8 – high-pressure hoses; 7 – RMD
hydraulic cylinders; 5* - main-valve – valve regulator BOSCH; 11 – drain oil filter; 10 – low-
pressure oil duct; 12 – drain oil duct; 13 – forced oil duct; 14 – draw-in oil duct; 15 – oil HMS
pump; 16 – oil pump drive, 17 – oil tank breather.
*) part of integral block BOSCH
Oil tank (2) – is of welded design with 35 l independent from clutch and is installed on
capacity.l is filled through filling neck plug the left side of the clutch body.
(1). The oil tank is provided with breather The drive consists of body (1), pinion (2)
(18) and oil level indicator (3). The bottom of installed on shaft slots, rotating on two ball
the tank has oil drain plug. bearings. Balls (4), placed in shaft openings,
Hydraulic system oil pump is of six-gear engage or disengage the shaft with splined
right-side rotation design. The pump drive is bushings (5, 7) by way of race (6) driven by
yoke via four-faceted roller (8)
1 - drive body; 2 – drive pinion; 3 shaft; 4 – balls; 5 – pump shaft bushing; 6 – race; 7 – bushing; 8
switching roller; 9 stop plate; 10 – bolt; 11 – pump.
Pinion (2) is permanently engaged with PTO left position) balls are brought to bushing (5)
drive pinion. In disengaged position (see hollows by means of race cone (6), and
switching diagram) race (6) is shifted to the rotation from pinion (2) via shaft (3) and
end right position, balls under centrifugal splined bushing (5) is transferred to the pump
forces disengage bushing (5) , and shaft (3) shaft. The drive can bear the second pump
with pinion (2) freely rotate in bearings. In the (NSH 10/16) driven from splined bushing (7).
engaged position (race is shifted to the end
The drive provides 1980 rev/min of pump b) using a wrench, turn via tetrahedron the
shaft at rated diesel revolutions, and clutch (3, switching roller (8) counter (clock-wise)
4, 5, 6, 7) allows to switch the mump on and as far as it goes.
off with diesel in operation at minimum idle c) tighten bolt (10)
run revolutions.
To switch the pump on/off: Hydraulic distributor (5) is a three-section,
four position, flow-type device made by
Integral block BOSCH consists of main valve BOSCH. Control valves of sections 2 and 3
distributor, control of external hydraulic are fixed in positions “neutral” and “floating”.
cylinders and regulator (9) with Control valve of section 1 can also be fixed in
electromagnetic control of mounting device. position “lift”. It is provided with automatic
a) release bolt (10) by 1.5…2.0 turns; reset from position "“lift" to position
”neutral” when rated pressure is reached.
11- high-pressure hoses; 9 regulator EHR –23 LS; 5 – hydraulic distributor; 8a – control valves
(adapters; 6 – control steel ropes; 7 – arm; 8 – control levers; 12 – hydraulic cylinder TS 90 x 250 (
2 pieces); “I” – lever of control valve 3; “II” lever of control valve 2; “III”- lever of control valve
1; 1 – drain hose; 2 – low-pressure oil conduit; 3 – drain filter; 4 – high-pressure oil conduit; 10 –
forced oil conduit.
Outlet openings of distributor’s sections are

used for rear hydraulic system outputs. If * manually screw the sensor in the eccentric
front mounting mechanism is installed, to the end, then turn it back by 0.5…1.0 turn
hydraulic cylinders are filled from the central and secure with check nut (5). If sensor is
distributor’s section by means of high- properly installed, control lamp of RMD
pressure hoses (HPH). lifting goes down in the end position.
Control valves (4) of distributor (see figure on IMPORTANT! Do not over tighten nut (5)
page 131) are controlled by two-way steel so as not to damage sensor (6) made of
ropes, that provide control of main valves (4) aluminum alloy.
of the distributor by means of levers (7)
mounted on the panel to the right of
operator’s seat. Steel ropes’ braiding is fixed
by nuts in arms (6) and (8).
By shifting any lever (7) from “neutral” (N)
forward as the tractor moves, control valve is
set to position “lowering” and “floating”,
backwards shifting sets to position “lifting”.
The system of mounting mechanism control
and adjustment consists of
electromagnetically controlled regulator,
position sensor ( movement induction sensor),
power sensor (two force-measuring pins),
control panel, electronic unit, wiring.
Position sensor (6) (see figure to the right) is
screwed in rear axle cover seat (4) and
controlled by eccentric (3) fixed on rotary
shaft (2). To install the sensor do the
following:
 lift RMD to utmost high position, so that
mark “A” on ascending section of
eccentric (3) was opposite moveable 1 – screw; 2 – rotary shaft; 3 – eccentric; 4
sensor rod (6); cover; 5 – check nut’ 6 – position sensor.
 if necessary, release screw (1) and rotate “A” – mark on the ascending part of the
eccentric (3) on shaft (2) until mark “A” eccentric.
coincides with moveable sensor rod;
tighten screw (1);
Power sensor is made in the form of two

power-gauging pins (5), being inserted in arm
(3) and serving as an axle for fastening lower
tie-rods (4). Position of the pin in the arm is
determined by clamp (1), coming inside the
slot of force-gauging pin and fixed on arm (3)
with two bolts (2).
Control of rear mounting device using

regulator BOSCH is carried out from the
main control panel (see page 135) installed to
the right of operator’s seat, as well as by
means of two remote pushbuttons (when
ganged up machines and tools are mounted),
situated on rear wheels’ wings (see figure on
page 134).
The following elements are brought out on the 1 – clamp; 2 – clamp fixing bolt (2pcs.); 3 –
main panel (page 135):handle (1) for arm; 4 – lower tie-rod; 5 – power-gauging pin
adjustment of lowering speed; handle (2) for (power sensor).
selection of the control method; handle (3) for
limitation of mounted mechanism lifting
height; lever (4) for adjusting depth of soil
tillage; handle (7) for lifting-lowering of rear
mounted machines, as well as lamps:
lifting/lowering signal lamps (5, 6) and
diagnostics (8).
5.12.2. Electronic system for RMD control
1 – a box of instrument panel relays; 2 – a box of instrument panel fuses; 3 – electronic unit; 4 –
main RMD control panel; 5 – sensor of RMD position; 6 – remote control button for RMD
lowering; 7 – remote button for RMD lifting control; 8 – electric lifting valve; 9 – electric lowering
valve; 10 – left-side force sensor; 11 – right-side force sensor; 12 electric sockets.
Electronic section of regulator control Electronic part of the system operates as

includes the following elements: follows. After diesel start, voltage is supplied
 main RMD control panel (pos.4) from box of relays (1) to electronic system
 remote RMD control buttons (pos. 6, 7); unit(3) via box of fuses (2). The electronic
 electronic unit (pos. 3); unit polls sensors, system control elements
 force sensors (pos. 10, 11); and after analysis commands electromagnetic
 sensor of RMD position (pos.5); regulators. The system is controlled either
 electromagnetic valves for lifting (pos.8) from main panel (4) situated in the tractor
and lowering (pos.9); cabin, or by remote control buttons (6, 7)
installed on rear wheels' wings.
 connecting cables with electric sockets
(pos. 12).
Main panel of RMD control
1 – handle for lowering speed control ( up – faster, down – slower); 2 – handle for selection of
adjustment method ( upper position – positional, lower – power, in-between – mixed adjustment); 3
- handle for control of mounted machine lifting height limitation (clockwise – minimum limitation,
anti clockwise – maximum limitation); 4 – lever for adjustment of soil tillage depth ( clockwise –
lesser depth, anti clockwise – greater depth; 5 – control lamp of mounted machine lifting (red light);
6 – control lamp of mounted machine lowering ( green light); 7 lever mounted machine control (up
– lifting, down – lowering, when pressing lever further down – putting the plough deeper, middle
position – switch off); 7a – locking switch (transportation) – locks lever (7) in the upper position by
shifting the switch to the right); 8 – control diagnostics lamp ( see malfunctions diagnostics).
Rear mounting device is controlled as  handle (1) – correction speed;

follows:  lever (4) – depth of soil tillage.
 use handle (2) to set control method,
depending on the nature of activities; Adjustments sensitivity is provided by the
 using handles (4) and (3) set ploughing automatic adaptation system, which
depth and machine lifting height in the suppresses unjustified high frequency of
transport position. adjustments in the power mode. Meanwhile,
 Move handle (7) to lower fixed position averaged adjustment frequency equals about 2
,to lower mounted machine. In this case Hz.
lamp (6) lights. If the system intensively heats up, reduce
In the process of work make adjustment for correction frequency by moving handle (2) to
optimal operation of the mounted machine: the positional method side, and handle (1)
 using handle (2), set combination of towards “turtle”.
adjustment methods;
When the plough shallows up when tilling

hard soil or pot holes, put it deeper by
pressing lever (7) further down.
After handle (7) is released, it resets to fixed WARNING! When using remote buttons,
position “lowering” to the depth, set by do not stand between the tractor and
handle (4). machine being ganged up. To avoid
To shallow the plough up, move handle (7) to accidents, in no way use buttons of
upper position. During lifting lamp (5) lights. mechanical transfer of electrical valves (8,
9) (page 134) for lowering/lifting of the
CAUTION! To avoid RMD pump failure, mounted machine. They are intended for
do not operate the tractor if lamp (5) adjustment of the control system by skilled
doesn’t go out after tool lifting. specialists.
Put the control system in operation in the

One has to know the following features of order, given in items 2, 3.
starting the system of rear mounting device
control: CAUTION! To avoid still further tool
1. After diesel start diagnostics lamp (8) (plough, etc) deepening during emergency
lights, which signals about operation tractor stop, shift control lever (7) to
ability and steering system locking; position “neutral”. After tractor starts
2. To unlock the system, put lever (7) of movement shift the lever to position
lifting/lowering in the operation position “lowering” (the plough will be put to
several times. Diagnostics lamp (8) goes earlier set depth).
down. Besides functions described above, the
3. After the system is unlock, due to safety electronic system of rear mounting device
considerations, during the first instance of control has “damping” mode (damping of
switching on the speed of rear mounting mounted machine swing in the transport
device lifting is limited. Repeated setting mode).
of lever (7) in the operation position Set damping mode in the following order:
relieves lifting speed limitation.  shift handle (7) to position “lifting” (RMD
4. Lifting/lowering of rear mounting device lifts to upper top position and
by means of remote buttons, located on automatically switches off);
rear wheels’ wings, can be effected with  switch on “damping” mode (18) (page
any control mode ( levers can be in 82, 97) ( RMD goes from the end upper
arbitrary position). Control system in the position down by 3% of full RMD travel.
cabin is locked in this case. “Damping” switch may be situated on the
main RMD control panel (pushbutton with
mark, or DL, or FDA control panel
(pushbutton with plate) (see page 82, 97).
ATTENTION!
1. “Damping” mode is active only when When major defects are detected, adjustment
handle (7) is in position “Lifting”. stops and the system switches off. It can’t be
2. During field works (ploughing, operated neither by the main panel, nor by
cultivation, etc.), “Damping” mode remote pushbuttons. The control lamp gives
switch should be in position “Switched out malfunction code. After the malfunction is
off” corrected and diesel start, the system
operation is restored.
Malfunction diagnosis Average malfunctions result in system
Electric hydraulic control system BOSCH has locking and stop of adjustment. The system is
self-testing capability and upon finding the not controlled by the main panel, but is
fault gives coded information for the operator controlled by remote pushbuttons. The control
by means of control diagnostics lamp (page lamp displays malfunction code. After the
135, pos. 8) on the control panel. After engine malfunction is corrected and diesel starts, the
start, if the system has no malfunctions, the system operation is restored.
control lamp is constantly alight. After With minor defects the control diagnostics
shifting RMD control lever (page 135, pos.7) lamp displays malfunction code. The system
up or down, the control lamp goes down. is under control and not locked. After the
When shifting the control lever down, green defect is removed, the diagnostics lamp goes
RMD lowering control lamp lights (page 135, down.
pos. 6), upwards shifting leads to red control
lamp lighting (mounting device lifting) (page
135, pos.5).When the system has
malfunctions (after diesel start), the control
diagnostics lamp gives coded information on
malfunctions and, if required, the system
operation is locked
Malfunction code is a two digit number, the
first digit equals the number of control lamp
blinking after long pause, the second digit
corresponds to the number of blinking after a
short pause.
For example, long pause – three times lamp
blinking, short pause – six times lamp
blinking. It means that the system has
malfunction under code (36). When the
system has several malfunctions, their codes
are displayed one after another, separated by a
long pause.
All malfunctions are divided into three
groups: major, average and minor.
When the system detects a malfunction,

perform the following operations: CAUTION!
1. Disconnect electric sockets of the
1. Shut down the diesel. mounting device control system only
2. Arrange controls on the main control with diesel shut down.
panel (page 135): 2. Make measurement of the given
 shift mounting device control lever (7) in voltage values with diesel in operation,
position “ switched off”; observing safety regulations adopted
 shift lift limitation lever (3) in position for work with energized electric
“0”. devices.
 Shift lever (4) (adjustment of soil depth 3. Numbering of contacts in bundle
tillage) in position “0”; sockets is shown on sockets’ bodies.
 Shift lowering speed adjustment lever (1)
in the middle position;
 Shift lever (2) for adjustment of “power-
positional” mode in the middle position.
3. Start the diesel and, if there are no defects,

begin the work. If malfunctions were not
removed, make diagnostics of the system
and correct problems
Possible malfunctions and methods of their
detection are listed in table 5-12.
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual. Section 5. Design and operation
MAJOR DEFECTS
Table 5 –12
Defect Description, possible cause Method of defect check
Code
11 Malfunction in the Disconnect cable assembly from the electromagnet and test
electromagnetic lifting it for break. Electromagnet resistance should be 2…4
valve control circuit. Break Ohm maximum. If the electromagnet is healthy, check
in the electric magnet cable assembly for mechanical damage and using tester
winding or cable assembly check wire between terminal of electromagnet socket
of electric magnet control (page 143) and terminal (37) of 55- pole socket of the
(8) (page 135) electronic unit for break (page 143, 144)
12 Malfunction in the Disconnect cable assembly from the electromagnet and test
electromagnet lowering it for break. Electromagnet resistance should be 2…4 Ohm
valve control circuit. Break maximum. If the electromagnet is healthy, check cable
in the electric magnet assembly for mechanical damage and using tester check
winding or cable assembly wire between terminal of electromagnet socket (page 143)
of electric magnet control and terminal (19) of 55-pole socket of the electronic unit
(9) (page 135) for break (page 143, 144).
13 Malfunction in the Disconnect cable assembles from the electromagnet, test
electromagnet lowering or electromagnets for short-circuit. Electromagnet resistance
lifting control circuit. should be 1.6 Ohm maximum. You may also check
Short-circuit in one of electromagnet consumption current by supplying 6V
electromagnets, or shorting voltage. Current should not exceed 3.2 A. Having
of wires of electromagnets disconnected the socket from the electronic unit, test
control in cable assembly terminals (19) and (35) for short circuit (page 143, 144).
9page 135, pos.8, 9) Electromagnets should be disconnected.

code
14 Failure in the circuit of Check the general system cable assembly for
lowering and lifting mechanical damage. Disconnect the socket from the
electromagnetic valves control. electronic unit, disconnect terminal from
Wire break in the cable electromagnets, and test wire between terminal (35)
assembly of electromagnets (page 144) of the electronic unit terminal and
control. terminal (2) of electromagnets sockets. Test supply
voltage on terminal (29) of the electronic unit socket
( start diesel for this purpose). If there is no voltage,
check how secure is connection of wires to a fuse,
and a fuse itself. The fuse is in box of fuses (2)
(page 134). Voltage is supplied to the fuse from
relays box (1) after diesel start.
15 Defect of remote control Check cable assemblies to remote control buttons
pushbuttons. Wires short- for mechanical damage. Sequentially switch off each
circuit or locking of one of button until defect disappears. When switching
remote control buttons. buttons off, shut down the diesel. If defect does not
Meanwhile, the mounting disappear after buttons are switched off, disconnect
device starts lifting up or the socket from the electronic unit and test terminals
lowering down upon diesel (36) and (37) and (9) for continuity and short-circuit.
start
16 Electronic unit malfunction. Disconnect general cable assembly from the main
Stabilized supply voltage to the control panel. Measure stabilized supply voltage on
control panel is lower than contacts (6) (minus) and (4) (plus) of the main panel
rated value. Short circuit of socket (page 144), which should be 9.5 V (diesel
RMD power and position must be started). With lower supply voltage, or
sensors sockets is possible due absence thereof, check if electronic unit socket is
to moisture entrapped. properly connected. Test contact (6) of main panel
socket connection to tractor’s minus. Disconnect
sensors of power and position one by one.

code
17 Failure of the tractor electric Check supply voltage of the lifting device electronic
supply system. RMD control control system from the box of relays (1) (page 134)
supply voltage exceeds rated via box of fuses (2) after diesel start. With supply
value (over 18 V). Possible voltage of 12V or over, check generator operation
generator fault. ability.
22 Failure of position sensor. Check:
Break of sensor wire, or the  if electric socket is properly connected to position
sensor is not connected. sensor (5) (page 134);
 cable assembly, connected to the sensor, for
mechanical damage;
 if RMD eccentric properly set, i.e., with max RMD
lowering, the sensor should be in min pressed state,
and visa versa;
 adjustment of position sensor (if malfunctioning is
manifested in the lowest RMD position, screw in
the sensor, if it is in the top most position, the
sensor should be unscrewed).
Average size defects
23 Malfunction of the main Check if control panel and electronic unit are properly
control panel. Potentiometer connected, also check cable assembly for mechanical
of depth ploughing is faulty damage. Check output voltage according to electrical
(page 135, pos.4) diagram.
control panel. Potentiometer connected, as well as cable assembly for mechanical
of the RMD upper end damage. Check output voltage according to an electric
position is faulty. diagram. (page 144)
control panel. RMD control connected, as well as cable assembly for mechanical
lever is faulty (page 135, item damage. Check output voltage according to electric
7) diagram (page 144).
MTZ 2022/2022V –Operation manual Section5. Design and operation

code
31 Malfunction of the right-side Check cable connection to the sensor and check the
power sensor. Cable break or cable for mechanical damage. Power sensor overload
sensor short-circuit (page 134, is also possible.
item 11)
32 Malfunction of the left-side Check cable connection to the sensor and check the
power sensor. Cable break or cable for mechanical damage. Power sensor overload
sensor short-circuit (page 134, is also possible.
item 10)
Minor defects
33 Malfunction of tractor electric Check supply voltage of the mounting device

supply system. RMD control electronic control system from box of relays (page
supply voltage is below rated 134, item 1) via box of fuses (2) after diesel start.
value (less than 12 V). Burning of Supply voltage should not be less than 12V. If
fuse in the box of relays (page supply voltage is less than 12V, check the
134, item 1), or poor fuse contact generator. Check if connection in the box of relays
in the box of fuses (2) (1) and box of fuses (2) is reliable, as well as
connection of wires.
34 Malfunction of the main control Check if control panel and electronic unit sockets
panel. RMD speed control are properly connected, as well as cable assembly
potentiometer is faulty. (page 135, for mechanical damage. Test output voltage
item 1). according to wiring diagram (page 144).
36 Malfunction of the main control Check if control panel and electronic unit sockets
panel. Potentiometer for mixing are properly connected, as well as cable assembly
ploughing modes: power- for mechanical damage. Test output voltage
positional, is faulty. (page 135, according to wiring diagram (page 144).
item 2)
37 Electric-hydraulic regulator is Check pressure of one of distributor sections foe
faulty. It’s possible that high- control of external hydraulic cylinders, which
pressure mump is not switched on. should not be less than 180…200 kgs/cm2. With
diesel shut down, check movement of regulator
control valve by acting on them by way of rubber
cups of electromagnets. The control valve must
move smoothly.
-к основному пульту управления – to the main control panel

- к блоку предохранителей – to the box of fuses
- к выключателю демпфирования – to the damping switch
- к датчику усилия правому – to the right-side effort sensor
- к датчику положения НУ – to the MD position sensor
- к электроклапану опускания (черная колодка) –to electric lowering valve )black shoe)
- к электронному блоку – to the electronic unit
- защелка – stop catch
- минус питания (масса)- supply minus (ground)
- разъемы (кабина – трансмиссия) – connectors (cabin – transmission)
- к электроклапану подъема (желтая колодка) – to electric lifting valve (yellow shoe)
- к правому выносному пульту – to the right-side remote panel
- к левому выносному пультy –to the left side remote panel
- к датчику усилия левому – to the left-side effort sensor
-
- Numbering of connectors’
contacts not shown in the
figure, are imprinted on base
members of connectors.
Connecting cables of RMD control system

Electronic unit
- выключатель компенсации колебаний –switch of swing damping

- масса – ground
- индикация диагностики – diagnostics indication
- способ регулирования – adjustment method
- скорость опускания – speed of lowering
- ограничение подъема – lifting limitation
- величина заглубления – penetration value
- подъем–опускание, быстрое опускание, опускание, выключено, подъем – lifting-lowering, lowering,
switched off, lifting
- индикация , подъем, опускание – indication, lifting, lowering
- питание, сигнал, масса - power, signal, ground
- электромагнитный гидравлический регулятор – electro-magnetic hydraulic controller
- датчик положения – position sensor
- датчик усилия – effort sensor
- левый выносной пульт- left-side remote panel
- правый выносной пульт – right-side remote panel
Make voltage measurements, shown in

the diagram, relative to electronic unit
“negative” (terminals 1, 20, 38 ) on
the 55-contact connector assembly
Wiring colors:
Г – blue
Ж – yellow
З – green
К – red
Кч – brown
О – orange
Р – rosy
С – grey
Ф – violet
Ч – black
Wiring connection diagram of RMD control system.

5.12.3. Rear mounting device (RMD)
Rear mounting device is intended for coupling Cylinders’ rods are connected to outside left-
mounted and semi-mounted agricultural machinery to side and right-side levers (3) by means of pins
the tractor. Mounted machinery is ganged up to the (3a). Outside levers through splined openings
tractor via three points: joints of lower tie-rod, upper are installed on shaft (2) on the rear axle
tie-rod or my means of automatic pick-up hitch. cover (1) Levers (3) are connected to lower
Rear axle hoses bear arms (11) on which two hydraulic tie-rods (7) by means of braces (5)
cylinders are installed by means of pins (10).
1 – rear axle cover; 2 – rotation shaft; 3 – outside levers (left-side and right-side); 3a – pins of hydraulic
cylinders’ rods; 4 – hydraulic cylinders; 5 – braces; 6 – upper tie-rod; 7 – lower tie-rods; 8 – eyelets; 9 – ties;
10 – pins; 11 – arms; 12 – arms of ties; 13 – pins ( force sensors); 14 – arms.
Lower tie-rods with their front joints are put in arms their yoke section by means of pins. Braids
(14) ( left-side and right-side) on special pins (13) provide adjustment of transversal movements
which are force adjustment sensors. Lower tie-rods
have eyelets (8) to which braces (9) are fastened with
5.12.3.1. Brace
The brace consists of screw (1), guide (2),

crosshead (3), cotter pin (4).
Lateral side of guide (2) has a through groove
and a through opening perpendicular to it.
The crosshead has two through openings in
one plane. 1- screw; 2 – guide; 3 – crosshead; 4 – cotter
Use the following procedure to adjust braces’ pin.
length upon mounting agricultural machinery
on rear ends of lower tie-rods.
 lift the machine to the upper position until
rods of hydraulic cylinders fully extend.
 align opening on guide (2) with an
opening on crosshead (3). In case of
misalignment, rotate guide (2) clockwise
or anti clockwise until openings are
aligned.
 Insert cotter pin (4) in the opening and fix
it with a spring clamp.
When the tractor operates with a plough, use
brace groove to provide its horizontal travel.
To this end, remove cotter pin (4) rotate guide
(2) by 90 0 and put the cotter pin in the
crosshead opening (3).
The other braces’ end with the joint is put in
braces’ arms (12)( page 145). Braces’ arms
are fixed on the lower part of hoses.
Upper tie-rod is fixed in the arm of towing-
coupling device (see page 147).
5.12.4 General-purpose traction-coupling device (TCD)
TCD if the lifting type includes the yoke and arm (5), tie-rod (6) connected to the arm with
(optional), towing beam and device of pin (7).
“Python” type. Tie-rod (6) can be adjusted to size 395 and
Yoke (TCD-3V) 495 mm from PTO end face to the place of
The yoke is intended for operating one and trailer yoke connection by rearranging pin (7)
two-axle trailers. in tie-rod (6) openings.
It consists of traction yoke (1) with pivot and Device of “Python” type (TCD-2P)
housing (2). The housing of the traction yoke It is designed for operating the tractor with
is connected to arm (4) by means of pin (3). semi-mounted machines and one-axle trailers.
The height of housing with traction yoke can IMPORTANT! First remove tie-rod (6) of
be changed by its movement along guides in the mounting device.
arm (4) and is fixed by pin (3). Device (item 8) is installed in arm guides (4)
Trailing device (TCD –1M-01) traction and fixed by bolts (9). To couple a trailer,
beam remove pin (10), put trailer’s towing shackle
It is intended for coupling heavy trailing and on pivot (8) and put pin (10) in place. The
semi-trailing machines. It consists of support latter prevents trailer’s towing shackle
disconnection.
1 – traction yoke with pivot; 2 – housing; 3 – pin; 4 – arm; 5 – support arm; 6 – tie-rod; 7 pin; 8 –
pivot; 9 – bolts; 10 – pin.
5.12.5 Front mounting device (FMD) (if installed)
FMD is designed for tractor operation as part

of ganged up machines and intended for
attaching mounted agricultural machines,
operating in front of the tractor, and
adjustment of their operational position.
- side outlets; 2 – oil conduit; 3 – oil conduit; 4 – rotation shaft; 5, 6 – levers; 8 – lever; 9 –
hydraulic cylinder; 10 – arm; 11 – brace; 11, 12 – lower tie-rod; 14, 15 – braces; 16 – arm, axle of
lower tie-rods.
FMD –equipped tractor can have independent Double-action hydraulic cylinders on one side
power take-off shaft, installed on the front are fastened to arm (10), and by means of
arm surface. rods – to steering levers (5, 6) installed on
Procedure of coupling agricultural machinery steering shaft (4) splines. Steering levers with
to the FMD is similar to that of their braces (11) are connected to lower tie-
rear mounting device, except that it uses rods (12, 13) of the mounted machine, put on
automatic coupling SA-1. axle (17), going through arm (10). The same
FMD has the mechanism for limiting down axle also bears arms (16) connected to lower
travel of lower tie-rods’ front joints during tie-rods by means of braids (14, 15)
operation with machines. The rotation shaft has lever (8) of lowering
FMD is installed on the front beam plane limitation mechanism. In operational position
and fastened to beam side surface and spars it rests against the pin, installed in arm (10).
by means of plates. Oil conduits (2, 3) Upper tie-rod (7) with one end is connected to
connect side outlets (1) to hydraulic cylinders lever (8), and with another one – to an
(9) of the mounting device. agricultural machine.
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual. Section 5. Design and operation
5.13. The system of cabin ventilation an heating
The ventilation and heating system includes a

fan with a motor and a radiator that is
installed in the cabin cover, as well as two air
purification filters.
Observe the following recommendations for
efficient operation of the ventilation and
heating system:
1. After filling the cooling system with
cooling fluid (water) start the diesel, and
without opening the cock (1) on the right-
side of the diesel cylinder block, let it
operate at middle speed until cooling fluid
in the cooling system heats up to 50-60
0
C. After that, open the cock, increase
diesel speed for 1-2 minutes until fluid
fills the heater radiator. Having opened 1 – cock; 2 – drain plug.
the right-side drain plug (2), make sure
fluid circulates through the heater. The 4. To drain cooling fluid from the heater and
heater radiator must heat up. The level of diesel cooling system, place the tractor on
cooling fluid in the diesel cooling system horizontal terrain, Remove expansion tank
radiator will drop. plug, unscrew left- and right-side drain plugs
2. Fill in the diesel cooling system radiator (2), open drain radiator and diesel cylinder
with cooling fluid to the required level ( block plugs.
up to mark “MAX” on the expansion
tank). CAUTION! During cold season blow
3. To heat the cabin fast switch on the heater through the heating system with compressed
fan and open circulation shutters. air to avoid formation of ice plugs, if soft
water is used in the cooling system. To this
end, close water drain cocks on the radiator
and diesel cylinder block, and put expansion
tank plug.
5. During warm season, cock (1) should be

closed so that the system could operate in the
ventilation mode.
5.14. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

license plate illumination lamp, road train
The tractor is equipped with direct current sign lamp, flashing beacon, cabin illumination
electrical equipment with 12V tractor-system ceiling lamp, switch of emergency light
rated voltage. The starting system voltage of alarm, sound alarm and a set of horns, under-
24 V is provided by two storage batteries steering wheel switches, switches and relays
connected in series, 12 V each. for switching corresponding devices.
The wiring diagram and list of complete parts Control over tractor systems functioning is
are given in supplement on page 228-230. effected by means of:
The electrical equipment includes electric  a set of devices, including an indicator of
power sources, diesel start instruments, air pressure in the pneumatic system with
control and measurement instruments, a signal lamp of emergency pressure, an
lighting devices, light and sound alarm, indicator of oil pressure in the gear box;
switching devices and auxiliary equipment. an indicator of oil pressure in the diesel
Electrical equipment devices are connected lubrication system with a signal lamp of
according to one-wire principle, with metal emergency pressure, an indicator of
tractor parts (“ground”) to which negative cooling fluid temperature in the diesel
terminals of electrical equipment devices are cooling system with a signal lamp of
connected, serving the function of the second emergency temperature, an indicator of
wire. fuel level in tanks with a control lamp of
Source of tractor electric power are two the reserve level, voltage indicator for the
storage batteries of 12V voltage and 120 A/h electrical equipment system;
capacity each, and alternating current  a box of control lamps;
generator with built-in rectifier unit and  electrical tachometer-speedometer with a
integral voltage regulator. control panel;
Rated generator voltage is 14V, and rated  sound alarm ( buzzer) of emergency
power is 2000 W. modes – emergency oil pressure in the
Diesel starting system consists of an electric system of diesel lubrication, emergency
starter with 24 V voltage and power of 4.0 temperature of cooling fluid in the diesel
kW, starter switch and devices, starter control cooling system.
unit, starter switching on relay, plugs with
control unit. Purpose and functions of devices, making up
Illumination, light and sound alarm devices the instruments combination, as well as an
include: two road head -lights with upper and electrical tachometer-speedometer with a
lower beams, four front and four rear working panel, and a box of control lamps, are
head –lights, turn and side indicators, rear described in section 4 “ Controls and
turn indicators, side lights and braking signal instrumentation”.
lamps,
Below are listed sensors of instrumentation To obtain information about tractor

and indicators of emergency modes, or operational parameters two sensors of rear
operational ability of assemblies and systems wheels rotation frequency are used: sensor of
of the tractor: PTO rotation frequency, signal from
generator phase winding to provide control
 sensor of cooling fluid temperature of the over rotation frequency of the engine
diesel cooling system; crankshaft.
 sensor of emergency temperature signal Switch of diesel start locking serves to
lamp for diesel cooling system; exclude diesel start with gear shifted.
 sensor of oil pressure in the diesel Auxiliary equipment includes:
lubrication system;  cabin air conditioning and heating system;
 sensor of emergency oil pressure in the  front windshield wiper;
diesel;  rear windshield wiper;
 sensor of diesel air filter clogging;  windshield washer.
 sensor of the indicator of pneumatic
system air pressure; Electric power consumers and their circuits
 sensor of emergency drop of pneumatic are protected by fuses situated in boxes.
system air pressure;
 switch of control lamp of parking brake
engagement;
 sensor of fuel level indicator and signal
lamp of reserve fuel level;
 temperature sensor of plugs control unit;
 sensor of emergency braking fluid level;
 sensor of emergency oil pressure in
HTDS;
 sensor of GB oil pressure;
 stop light switches.
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual Section 6. Tractor pre-starting procedures
6. TRACTOR PRE-STARTING PROCEDURES
6.1. General requirements

 check braking fluid level in tanks of main
Before putting new tractor in operation, do cylinders of clutch hydraulic –static drives
the following: and main brakes, add it, if required.
 wash the tractor;  fill in diesel cooling system with coolant
 carefully examine the tractor, check it for up to level “MAX” on the expansion tank
completeness; remove storage batteries, control window;
bring them to operational state and install  check and adjust generator belt tension, if
back; necessary;
 check tension of threaded connections,  grease tractor mechanisms and assemblies
and tighten them up, if required; according to supplement 11.8;
 check oil level in the engine crankcase in  check and bring air pressure to normal in
the transmission, front axle housing, front tires, if necessary.
wheels’ reduction gears, hydraulic system
oil tanks, and add it, if required. CAUTION! Before putting the tractor in
 Drain available fuel from fuel tanks and operation, make sure protective guard
fill them in with new stilled fuel: in winter shields are in place ( rear PTO end shield,
– with winter-grade fuel, in summer – etc.
with summer grade one.
 switch on SB;
6.2. Diesel pre-starting and starting  turn starter key to position “I” (fixed). In
procedures the control lamps box the lamp of
emergency oil pressure in HTDS lights,
Start at normal conditions (+4 0C and above) and in the combination of devices – lamps
CAUTION! Start the diesel only from of emergency oil pressure in the diesel
operator’s working place. (buzzer sounds), indicator of air pressure
(if it is below the rated value), indicator of
IMPORTANT! Never start diesel with voltage and indicator of fuel level (if fuel
cooling system not filled in. in tanks is in reserve level);
 turn starter key to position “III” (Start) by-
 engage tractor parking brake; passing position “II” (Plugs) Meanwhile,
 open fuel tank cock; in the box of control lamps, diesel start
 fill in fuel and bleed fuel supply system control lamp lights ( orange).
to remove air;
 shift fuel supply lever in the middle
position, and PTO control lever in
position “brake”;
 install lever of gear and range shift of GB
in neutral position;
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual Section 6. Tractor pre-start procedures
 If after turning key to position “III” the Starting at low temperatures (+ 4 0C and
control lamp is flashing at small below)
frequency (about 1.5 Hz), it means that
GB shifting lever is not in neutral position IMPORTANT! To avoid power
or break in the circuit if diesel start transmission damage, do not push or tow the
locking is possible. Control lamp flashing tractor to start diesel by towing.
at greater frequency (about 3 Hz) testifies
to the fact, that the circuit of the generator
phase winding is faulty (terminal “W”).  Turn starter key to position “II” (Plugs) In
 Keep the key in before diesel start, but for this case in the box of control lamps
not more than 15s; if diesel doesn’t start plugs’ control lamp lights, giving signal of
repeat the attempt, but not earlier than in switching on and heating of pre-start air
30…40 seconds. If after the third try heating plugs. Keep the key in this
diesel doesn’t start, find out and correct position. As soon as the control lamp
the problem. starts flashing, the diesel is ready for start.
 After diesel start check operation of all  Turn starter key to position “III” and start
indicator lamps and devices’ readings ( the engine, as shown above for starting
cooling fluid temperature, oil pressure in the diesel at normal conditions.
the diesel and GB, storage batteries  To start diesel at ambient temperature
charging, etc.) Let diesel operate at 1000 below 200 C, use special circulation
rev/min until pressure gets stable in the cooling fluid heater in combination with
operation range. pre-start heating plugs.
IMPORTANT! Your tractor is equipped NOTE: The circulation heater of cooling

with turbo charged diesel. High turbo fluid is used for the cooling system, filled in
charger revolutions require proper diesel with antifreeze.
lubrication. When starting diesel for the first
time , or after prolonged storage, rotate the  With stable low ambient temperature, use
crankshaft using starter for 10 seconds with winter-grade oils* in the diesel crankcase,
no fuel supply to provide lubrication of transmission, hydraulic system and HTDS
turbo charger bearings. Let diesel operate in accordance with recommendations of
idle for 2…3 minutes before loading it. the present manual. Keep storage batteries
fully charged.
Use pure winter-grade diesel fuel with no
water impurities. To avoid malfunctions, daily
drain sediment from fuel filter sump and fuel
tanks.
IMPORTANT! Fill in fuel tanks daily at

the end of each working day to exclude
condensate formation inside tanks.
__________________________
*) If winter-grade oil is not available, you may use
mixture of summer-grade motor oil with 10…12% of
diesel fuel.
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual Section 6. Pre-start procedures
6.3. Tractor take off and movement
CAUTION! Tractor is equipped with

one-person seat. During tractor operation
no outsiders are allowed.
To bring tractor to motion fulfill the following

operations:
 reduce diesel speed;
 press clutch pedal to the full; select
required range. To this end:
- shift lever (4) to one of the positions “A”,
“B” or “R” according to diagram of range
shifting “I”;
- press pushbutton (1) to switch on lowest
GB reduction gear stage (L) or pushbutton
(2) to switch on higher reduction gear
stage (H).
- Shift the required gear, having pushed
gear shifting lever (3) from “neutral” to
one of positions 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 according
to diagram of gear shifting “II”; IMPORTANT! Shifting to reduction gear
- Disengage the parking brake, smoothly stages “L” or “H” is possible only after
release clutch pedal and increase diesel gear shifting lever (3) is put to neutral
speed at the same time. Tractor starts position.
movement.
IMPORTANT! To shift gear, smoothly
IMPORTANT! To avoid noisy shifting, (with no sharp jerks) push lever (3)
shift range shifting lever (4) only when according to shifting diagram II and keep
tractor stops completely. it pressed until gear is fully shifted.
Do not keep your foot on the clutch pedal
during tractor operation., as it will lead to
clutch slippage, overheating and ultimate CAUTION! Always press clutch pedal
failure. before shifting to required range or gear
in the GB.
6. 4.Tractor stop
6.4.1. Diesel stop
To stop tractor:
IMPORTANT! Before shutting diesel down,
 reduce diesel speed; lower an agricultural machine down, let
 press clutch pedal to the full; diesel operate at 1000 rev/min for 3…5
 shift gear shifting lever and range shifting minutes. This will allow to reduce
lever to neutral position; temperature of diesel cooling fluid.
 release clutch pedal;
 stop tractor by means of main brakes; To shut down diesel:
 engage the parking brake.
 shift lever of fuel supply control to
CAUTION! For urgent tractor stop sharply position corresponding to zero supply*.
press clutch and brake pedals  Switch off PTO;
simultaneously.  Push all distributor handles to neutral
position;
 Lower agricultural machine down to the
ground;
 Switch off SB to avoid discharging
_________________________________-
*) Pull diesel shut down auxiliary handle back
( diesel is equipped with six –plunger in-line
fuel pump “Motorplan”, Czeckia, or
“YAZDA”, Russia)
6.5. Running - in Correct choice of gears for concrete work

conditions saves fuel and reduces diesel wear.
IMPORTANT! Initial 30 hours of tractor 5. avoid sustained unloaded operation at
operation greatly effect operation parameters minimal or maximum diesel speed.
an operation life of the tractor, its diesel in 6. Avoid sustained tractor operation at
particular. constant diesel speed.
7. To guarantee alignment of friction clutch
Your new tractor will operate reliably and for parts in the process of running-in,
a long time, if running-in is properly carried smoothly and more often engage the
out, and servicing is made in recommended clutch.
time intervals. 8. Carry out regular daily maintenance in
compliance with recommendations set
CAUTION! Initial 15 hours of operation forth in section 9 “Scheduled
should be spent at easy transport works, and maintenance” of the present manual.
remaining running-in time – at field works
using HMS.
Take the following precautionary measures

during 30-hours running-in:
1. Monitor readings of instrumentation,
lubrication system operation, cooling and
power systems operation. Check oil and
fuel level in proper tanks.
2. Check tension and tighten outside
fastening couplings.
3. Do not overload the diesel, do not allow
fuming and speed reduction. Signs of
overload are sharp drop of speed, fuming
and diesel no response to increased fuel
supply. High gear operation under load
leads to exorbitant wear of friction diesel
parts.
4. Tractor operation at too low gear with
small load at high diesel speed results in
fuel over-consumption.
12. Replace paper filtering elements of diesel

6.6 Maintenance after 30 hours running-in and hydraulic system filters (operation 22,
33).
1. Examine and wash the tractor. 13. Grease bearing of clutch shifter (operation
2. Listen to functioning of all tractor 17).
assembles. 14. Drain condensate from the pneumatic
3. Check tension of diesel cylinder heads’ system cylinder(operation 7).
fastening bolts, and tighten them, if 15. Check and, if necessary, restore air-
necessary (operation 42). tightness of air purifier and inlet duct
4. Clean rotors of diesel and gear box (operation 37).
centrifuges (operations 18, 19). 16. Check and, if necessary, tighten outside
5. Check clearance between valves and threaded connections (operation 43).
rockers and make adjustments, if required. 17. Control functioning of diesel, steering,
6. Clean GB meshed filter (operation 20). brakes, controls, illumination and signal
7. Check tension of generator belt (operation systems (operation 8).
13). Make adjustment, if necessary. 18. Lubricate all greasing points with a gun
8. Drain sediment from fuel tanks, diesel (operations 9, 10, 53).
fine and coarse filters (operation 12, 28).
9. Check and adjust, if necessary, free travel
of clutch pedal, brake pedal and
pneumatic system (operations 15, 31).
10. Check the state of storage batteries, clean
terminal connections an ventilation
openings (operation 32)
11. Change oil in:
 diesel crankcase ( operation 21);
 transmission (operation 46);
 housing of front PTO reduction gear (if
installed) (operation 51);
 wheel reduction gears and main FDA gear
case (operation 50).
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual ….Section 7. Ganging-up
7. TRACTOR GANGING-UP  Erected machine - machine coupled to the

power unit by means of auxiliary
According to state standard (GOST) all assembly units. Machine mass is fully
technical means are subdivided into the taken up by the power unit, and in rare
following groups by way of their ganging up: cases, partly.
 Mounted machine – machine hitched to Tractors MTZ 2022/2022V are equipped with
three-point mounting system. Mass of this standard towing-coupling and mounting
machine in transport position is fully devices, as well as a set of mounting
taken up by the power unit. openings, and provide all methods of ganging
 Semi-mounted machine – machine, which up. Besides, PTO and free extensions of the
mass in transport position is partly taken hydraulic system allow to drive tools of
up by the power unit, but mainly by its machines being ganged up, by mechanical or
own wheels. When the machine is hydraulic-static methods.
rearranged from operational to transport Below are listed parameters of tractor’s
position, the coupling point is transferred operation equipment, methodology of
to new height position. selecting technical means, data on allowable
 Semi-trailed machine - similar to semi- loading of the power unit as part of machine-
mounted machine, except that when tractor assembly (MTA).
rearranging from operational to transport Due to great variety of technical means being
position the point of hitching to the power ganged up, the present section deals only with
unit doesn’t change by height. general recommendations on ganging up
 Trailed machine - machine which mass procedures.
when in transport position is taken up by
its chassis system. When rearranging the
machine from operational to transport
position, the articulated coupling to the
tractor doesn’t change its position by
height.
MTZ 2022/2022V-Operation manual Section 7. Ganging up
7.1. Wheel span adjustment
Front wheels
Table 7-1
Standard tires Wheels Wheel span,
size position mm
A 1640
B 1750
C 1900
420/70R24 D 2010
A’ 1820
B’ 1930
C’ Rim fixing relative to disc:
2080
D’ A (A’), C (C’) – inside; B, (B), D (D’) –
2190
outside;
C, D – wheel rearrangement; A’, B, C’, D’ –
Wheel position with disc rotation (letters with
disc turning round
primes) should be used only in exceptional
cases.
Rear wheels
Table 7-2
Standa Wheel Wheel Size of hub H
rd positio span K, to semi-axle
tires n mm end face, mm
size
580/7 A 1710…2 250…5
0R38 210
C 2150…2 250…0
650
20.8 A 1710…2 250…0
R38 210
C 2150…2 250…0
650
* Changing wheel span by value P

corresponds to changing hub position by
value P/2 on each side.
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual Section 7. Ganging up
7.2. Rear wheels doubling to reduce unit pressure on soil
Table 7-3
Standard tires size in Wheel span, Mounting hub Distance piece
assembly K1,K2, mm dimensions, N, mm
20,8R38 + distance
piece + 20,8R38 K1 = 1710, 250 2522-3109030
K2 = 2905
HUB
DISTANCE PIECE
HALF-AXLE
7.3. MOUNTING AND TOWING-COUPLING DEVICES
7.3.1. Rear mounting device MD-3
Mounted machines: (ploughs, cultivators, planters, tillers, etc.); semi-mounted machines (ploughs,
soil tillage machines, planters, potato combine harvester, etc.)
- ось заднего колеса –rear wheel axle

- верхняя тяга – upper tie-rod
- задний ВОМ – rear PTO
- нижняя тяга - lower tie-rod
- БСУ—fast-coupling device with changeable joints (FCD)
- Зона ВОМ – PTO area
- Сменные шарниры – changeable joints
Table 7-4
Description Rear MD-3 (2)
cat. 3 Cat. 2
Lower tie-rods One-piece with FCD
Length of lower tie-rods, mm 1060

Size of changeable joints of
upper/lower tie-rods:
- diameter, mm 51 51
- width, mm 45 38
Nominal size of connecting elements:
- pin of upper tie-rod, mm 32 25.5
- joints of lower tie-rods, mm 37.4 28.7
Distance from PTO end face to 650
suspension axis, mm
Load capacity:
-on suspension axle, kN 60
- with overhang of 610 mm, kN 48
7.3.2. Front mounting device MD-2
Mounted machines: (cultivators, mower, tanks, etc.)
- зона ВОМ –PTO area

- верхняя тяга – upper tie-rod
- ВОМ передний – front PTO
- Нижняя тяга – lower tie-rod
- Ось переднего колеса – front wheel axle
- База- base
Table 7-5
Description Device parameters
Lower tie-rods Composite
Length of lower tie-rods, mm 885
Size of coupling elements of lower and upper tie-

rods:
- joint diameter, mm 25 or 28
- joint width, mm 51 or 45
Distance from PTO end face to suspension axle, 445
mm
Load capacity, kN:
- with overhang of 610 mm 23
- on suspension axle 25
* size refers to machine being mounted

MTZ 2022/2022V- Operation manual Section 7. Ganging up
7.3.3. Towing-coupling device TCD-1 ( single cross-piece)
Half-mounted machines (planters, potato planters, potato combine harvesters, vegetable harvesting
machines, etc.); half-trailed machines (mowers, pick-up presses, top-gathering machines, etc.)
Table 7-6
Coupler TCD-1 ( single cross-piece)
Installation place Suspension axle of lower tie-rods
Distance from PTO end face to coupling pin 650
axle, mm
Diameter of coupling pin, mm 30
Vertical load on TCD, kN 6.5
Machine turning angle relative to tractor, 80

degrees
MTZ 2022/2022V-Operation manual Section 7. Ganging up
7.3.4. Towing-coupling device TCD-1M-01 ( towing beam)
Half-trailed machines (same as for TCD-2V, TCD-2V), trailed machines (same as for TCD-2V and
TCD-3V)
Table 7-7
Coupling device Yoke reversible relative to PTO end

face
Distance from yoke to support 412 or 517
surface, mm
Distance from PTO end face to Pto-1,1C,2- 400 or PTO-3-500
axis of coupling pin, mm
Diameter of coupling pin, mm 30
Vertical load on TCD, kN 12
Machine turning angle relative to 85
tractor, degrees
Half-trailed machines: (half-trailers, fertilizer spreaders, etc.).

Trailed machines: (disc harrows, soil-tillage machines, coupled harrows, cultivators, planters, etc.).
Table 7-8
Coupler “Python”-type
Distance from yoke to support 507…897
surface for not PTO-driven
machines, mm
Pin position for PTO-driven Utmost lower, or utmost higher
machines
Distance from PTO end-face to 115
coupling pin axis, mm
Coupling pin diameter, mm 40
Machine turning angle relative to +/- 50

tractor, degrees
7.3.6. Towing-coupling device TCD-3V (lifting type)
Trailed machines (two-axle, truck-type trailers, etc), half-trailed machines (same as for TCD-1ZH).
Table 7-9
Coupler Rotating yoke with vertical movement ability

Distance from yoke to support surface 517…904 or 607…867 ( with yoke reverse )
for not PTO-driven machines, mm stepwise, with 65 mm
Yoke position for PTO-driven machines Utmost lower or utmost higher, yoke reversal
including
Coupling pin diameter, mm 40
Distance from PTO end face to coupling 320 (305*)
pin axis, mm
Machine turning angle relative to +/- 45 (trailers)

tractor, degrees +/- 50 (agricultural machinery)
**) Yoke reversal. In this case two upper openings with 27 mm diameter in the lifting device guard
arms are not used.
Rear mounting device MD-3 has been

designed under category 3 with readjustment Hydraulic-static power take-off can be made
capability for category 2 coupling elements via one of outlets for driving auxiliary
by changing independent joints of fast- hydraulic motor drives. To avoid hydraulic
coupling device (FCD). The use of system overheating, operation pressure should
changeable joints of category 3 and 2 allows not exceed 11 MPa, which corresponds to
to make simple readjustment and use power of 10 kW maximum. To drain oil from
machines from tractor sets of class 2 and 1.4 the hydraulic motor by-passing distributor, an
for operation in drastic climatic conditions or individual pipeline is provided.
on hard soil. The tractor is equipped with fittings with flow
The left-side brace is installed in size 740 area Du = 12 mm and connecting thread of
mm, which shouldn’t be changed with no M20 x 1.5. If necessary, to couple to different
particular need. fittings of machines being coupled,
Besides major openings for coupling with manufacture required adapters with flow area
lower tie-rods, braces have recess for ganging Du = 12 mm minimum yourself.
up with wide-grip machines for improved Towing-coupling device TCD –3V (lifting
terrain follow (cultivators, planters, and so type), page 186, and TCD –2P (“Python”-
on). type), page 165, are used according to
Couplers SA-2 and SA-1 can also be installed purpose. Coupling element TCD –2P is
on rear and front mounting devices, situated 115 mm away from PTO end face,
correspondingly. allowing to sustain considerable vertical load
Suspension axle of rear mounting device may with sufficiently longitudinal stableness of
have single cross-piece TMD –1. If PTO is MTA. Yoke of TCD-3V is located 320 mm
used, cardan shaft with nominal length of away from PTO end face, which allows to
1000 mm may be recommended. In this case gang up actively driven half-trailed and fully
suspension axle should be installed in the trailed machines, providing increased angle
middle of the cardan shaft, otherwise PTO between the tractor and a machine during
drive will be overloaded. turns. To obtain required steering capacity
The tractor has three pairs of free hydraulic criteria, vertical load on yoke TCD-3V is
drives for operating coupled technical means reduced as compared to TCD –2P.
(if front MD-2 is not provided). Design of lifting device guides provide for
Oil consumption through outlets is 45…55 installation of connecting lift (hook instead of
l/min (depending on the technical state of the yoke, etc.), manufactured by other companies.
hydraulic pump). Oil extraction by mounted
machine hydraulic cylinders should not
exceed 25 l. Check oil level in the hydraulic
tank with drawn-in rods of operation
cylinders.
To avoid oil leakage when ganging up of
technical means or during unforeseen
disconnection, stop and rupture devices are
provided (Enclosing half-clutches and rupture
devices are in tractor spare parts kit).
MTZ 2022/2022V –Operation manual Section 7. Ganging up
To mount PTO driven machines, the tractor

is equipped with TCD-1M-01(towing beam)
with changeable position of the coupling link
relative to PTO under category 3 and 2 ( 500
and 400 mm correspondingly).
If TCD –1M-01 is installed (towing beam)
TCD –2P “Python” is not provided. TCD-3V
(yoke) can be installed in upper position when
TCD-1M-01 and TCD-2P are installed. Also
in all cases rear mounting device need not be
dismantled.
Front mounting device of MD-2 type in its
design is similar to the rear one. It is installed
on front loads place and serves for making up
combined assembles ( cultivator – in front,
planter from rear side, etc), echelon mounted
devices (front and side mowers, etc.), as well
as for transportation of individual machines
from combined rear mounted devices for long
travel.
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual Section 7.Ganging up
7.4. PTO AND MACHINES’ DRIVE

Tractor: PTO end Machine: PIS hub
PTO 1C
(8 splines)
PTO 1
(6 splines)
PTO 2
( 21 splines)
PTO 3
(20 splines)
Type of the Rotation frequency, rev/min Power transferred

PTO end kW (h/p)
PTO Diesel
Rear PTO 1C 540 1924 60(80)

independent PTO 1 540 1924 60(80)
PTO 3 1000 1909 185(250)
Front PTO 2 1000 1845 50 (68)

independent
7.5. COUPLING DIAGRAM

Length of cardan shaft is
determined by distance L (shaft
is fully shifted) with horizontal
position of lower tie-rods. The
shaft is extended during
machine lifting, so check
telescopic elements’
overlapping. Tilting angle of the
joint on the side of PTO is
greater, than on the side of PIS.
Length of the cardan shaft L is

determined when turning a
machine to maximum angle
relative to tractor. If equality
A=B is not observed, rotation
irregularity sharply increases,
resulting in overload of the
whole drive.
The cardan shaft practically

doesn’t change length during
machine turn. Irregularity of
cardan shaft rotation during the
movement is compensated by
adjustment of angular velocity
joint.
MTZ 2022/2022V- Operation manual Section 7. Ganging up.
7.5.1. Cardan shafts with guard housing (machine accessory)
Cardan shaft of type 10 Cardan shaft of type 40
Telescopic, with safety coupling and general-

purpose cardan joints with guard housing.
Telescopic, with general-purpose cardan
joints and guard housing
Cardan shaft of type 50
Cardan shaft of type 20
Telescopic, with safety coupling and general-

purpose cardan shaft of equal angular
velocities, with guard housing.
Telescopic, with general purpose cardan joint
and joint of equal angular velocities, with
guard housing.
Table 7-11
Cardan shaft Torque, Length of cardan shaft, mm Housing diameter, D,
designation* N.m mm
L L1
10.016 160 510 150
10.040 400 560 175
L1 = 1.35 l 200
10.063 630 610
710 220
10.1000 1000 610
710
 Designation after the dot refers to cardan shafts of type 20, 40, 50
 L – distance between centers of fully shifted cardan shaft (nominal length).
 L1 – operation length of the cardan shaft.
 D1 = 1.75 – diameter of cardan joint housing of equal angular velocitis.
7.5.2. Cardan shaft installation
Table 7-12
Cardan shaft Coupler The end type Nominal length of
type cardan shaft, mm
MD-3 PTO 1C, 1, 3 610, 710
10 or 40 TCD-1ZH PTO 1C, 1,2 510
TCD-1 PTO3 710
TCD-3V
20 or 50 TCD-2 PTO 1C, 1 710
Installation of cardan shaft with guard

housing and protective PTO screen provide
coupling safety.
End yokes must be in one plane.
Table 7-13
Angle (degrees, max) of
cardan joints’ tilt
PTO General- Of equal
purpose angular
velocities
Swithe 22 25 (50 for
d on short time)
Switch 55 55
ed off
Overhang of telescopic cardan shaft elements

should be 110 mm minimum, to avoid
disconnection and jamming of the coupling
7.5.3. Selecting cardan shaft type
Usually, operation manuals of mounted machines list required power and rotation frequency of
PTO. In selecting a cardan shaft the most important characteristic is torque, which can be
determined in accordance with given below alignment shart:
Power, kW, h/p Rotation frequency, Torque, Nm

Rev/min
* 1000 rev/min, 540 rev/min – Standard PTO rotation frequency.

7.5.4. Cardan-less PTO drive
- шпильки – pins
- 2 отв. Глубина резьбы 25 мм – two openings, thread depth
- корпус ВОМ –PTO housing
- агрегатируемое средство – coupled machine
Some machinery can be coupled directly to Table 7-14

PTO without using the cardan shaft (reduction Type of the end A* C* min
gears, hydraulic pumps, etc). In this case the PTO 1; 1C;2 90 40
body should be centered with 162 mm
diameter in PTO cover, and to avoid abutment PTO 3 140 50
ductuli have to be provided on end face side
and at the outlet of PTO end splines. If
necessary, PTO cover fixing pins can be *) Dimensions refer to machine being ganged
substituted by elongated versions of the same up.
size, or lifting mechanism can be dismantled.
Coupling of machinery to rear and front PTO
is similar
7.6. SELECTION AND OPERATION OF AGRICULTURAL MACHINERY
The tractor can be ganged up to traction class To improve towing-coupling capability of the
3 machines, and machines completed with tractor, and provide steering criteria, one has
wheeled tractor of class 4. Besides, under to use ballast. To provide rational loads
unfavorable conditions , on hard soils tractor distribution and reduce number of MTA
may be coupled to machines in complete with passages, the use of combined assemblies is
tractors of class 1.4 and 2. Design of lifting reasonable.
and towing-coupling mechanisms, PTO and Three types of completeness are distinguished
hydraulic drives according to international according to ballast installation:
standards allows ganging up with foreign- - A – without front ballast;
made models. - B – with front ballast;
- C - with front ballast and mortar in front
To provide reliable, long-term and safe tires.
operation, observe recommendations on CaCl 2 (25 parts by weight) dissolved in water
tractor loading and stability if tractor-machine (75 parts by weight) can serve as mortar
assembly (MTA). Load on tractor front and poured in tires. The freezing temperature of
rear axles as part of MTA are determined by such mortar is – 32 0C, specific weight is 1.2 (
calculations. More easy way of determining as measured by hydrometer.
actual load on tractor axles is by weighing.
Index of longitudinal MTA stability is criteria
of steering, which equals relation of load on
driven axle to operational tractor weight.:
10 2 Tn
 0,2
Ku = m
Where, Tn – load on front axle, kN

m – operational tractor mass, kg
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual Section 7. Ganging up.
Wheels doubling allows to considerably

Maximum safe loads on tractor’s axles: reduce specific pressure on soil, preserve soil
structure, wet fields in particular.
- Front axle - T f min… T f max = 14.5…45.0 Wheels doubling on compacted soils allows
kN: to improve traction-coupling characteristics of
- Rear axle - T r min … T r max = 20.0…70.0 the power unit, in particular, in combination
kN: with tractor proper ballast installation and
but not more than total single tires load loading.
capacity of front and rear wheels.
If wheels are doubled for tires of the same or Procedure of MTA assembly and operation
different standard sizes, their total capacity features are given in operation manuals of
should be reduced by 20%. machines being coupled. In all cases
compliance with coupling elements, load
In all cases total load on tractor wheels should capacity of mounted machines and tires,
not exceed maximum allowable load on TCD and tractor
axles.
T f + T r -< 100 kN ( 10000 kgs) Machine operating width and tillage depth
mainly depend on specific soil resistance. It
Loads obtained on tractor and machine determines the range of operation speed with
propellers, used on fields, meadows and due account of agricultural requirements. The
pastures, should be checked for compliance harder the soil the higher specific resistance.
with norms of maximum pressure on soil and
normal mechanical stress in soil. GOST gives
complicated system of determining the given
above indices. Pressure on soil is higher than
air pressure in tires by approximately 0.02
MPa ( maximum value is chosen).
Soil compaction depends to a great extend on
the number of passages along the wheel track.
So it’s reasonable to reduce the number of
passages by combining operations by way of
combination of assemblies.
In view of traction force of 27…36 kN, agricultural machines by operation width,

tractor of class 3 develops on stubble, including the use of echelon-principle in
approximate calculation of operation width of coupling devices (harrows, cultivators,
major power consuming agricultural planters, etc).
machines with tractor MTZ 2022. Submitted Specific resistance is given for soil tillage
results give possibility to select speed of 5 km/h. Changing speed by 1 km/h
changes specific resistance by 1%.
Table 7-15
Machinery Specific resistance, kN/M Possible operation width, m
Ploughs:
Soils:
- Hard 18…25 1.2…1.6
- average 12…14 2.1…2.5
- light 6…8 up to 30
Disc harrows 1.6…2.1 Up to 15
Stubble breakers 6.0…10.0 3…5
Cultivators 1.6…3.00 Up to 15
Reaper 1.2…1.5 Up to 20
Combine harvesters:
Silage combine 2.6…3.3 Up to 3.0
Sugar beat harvester 6…12 Up to 3.0
Potato harvester 10…12 Up to 2.7
To control MTA operation, the control panel MTA assembling should take into account
of a mounted machine may be used. To install recommendations of a machine operation
the panel, one can drill holes in the cabin side manual. The manufacturer recommends to use
wall to fix it by means of self-threaded machines and tools that are designed for
screws. operating in its assembly. If there is no
To gang up mounted technical means protocol of agreement as to ganging up of
(spraying reservoirs, loaders , hay-stackers, technical means, the works is not liable for
etc), one can use erection openings of the tractor breakage, in cases of complicated
tractor to install framing beams and other ganging up in particular (mounted machines,
elements. combined and harvesting assemblies).
7.6.1. Tires load carrying capacity at various speeds of tractor travel.
Table 7-16
Standa Spe Load on one tire, KN, and air pressure corresponding to it, MPa Amount
rd tires of
ed, mortar
size
km/ 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 per each
h tire, l
420/7 30 15.45 17.20 18.80 20.35 183

0R24 10 19.00 21.15 23.15 25.00
580/7 30 31.50 35.05 38.35 41.35 507

0R38 10 38.75 43.10 47.20 51.00 58.1
5
20.8R 30 28.52 32.90 42.69 39.06 500
38 10 39.98 46.13 49.35 54.75
Tires inflation
- disconnect hose from tire valve and
Inflate tires via air intake valve of pressure coupling of air bleed-off valve;
regulator (1), having carried out the following - switch off the compressor and screw the
operations: wing nut up the coupling of air bleed-off
- release air from the cylinder through valve.
condensate removal cock;
- unscrew wing nut (2) of coupling air
bleed-off valve;
- connect air inflation hose to the coupling
air bleed-off valve and tire valve;
- switch on the compressor and inflate tire
to required pressure, checking by pressure
gauge.
CAUTION! When pressure rises to 770

kPa, the compressor by means of pressure
regulator is switched over to idle run, tires
inflation automatically stops. So periodically
check air pressure by pressure indicator in
the panel of instruments and, if needed,
reduce it by means of condensate release
cock.
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual Section 7. Ganging u
7.6.2. Plaughing
Ploughing is one of most power consuming

activities. Traditionally, MTZ tractors as part
of ploughing assemblies are used according to To obtain smooth tillage reversible (double)
principle “tractor wheels are in the furrow”. or rotating ploughs are used provided one side
This requires corresponding arrangement of furrow turn over.
wheels when operating ordinary, reversible Relatively smooth field can be obtained when
and rotating ploughs. ploughing with ordinary ploughs, if beginning
Still, the tractor can operate according to and finish of ploughing are carried out
principle ( tractor wheels – off the furrow” In according to given recommendations.
this case wheels arrangement is simplified. Type of plough, operation width (number of
Wheels doubling is getting reasonable to ploughs) depend on soil, its
improve traction-coupling parameters of the mechanical composition, stones availability,
tractor, in particular, when tires are filled with tillage depth. One plough requires about 15-
mortar. In this case it’s possible to operate 20 kW of power (for average soils).
crawler tractor ploughs after corresponding Operation width can be estimated, using
rearrangement thereof , as well as pull-type specific resistance of ploughs, that depends on
ploughs. soil and its mechanical composition.
Table 7-17
Soil Soil background Specific resistance (P) of ploughs for soils, Kn/m2:
Clay Heavy clay Average Clay sand

loam clay loam
Black earth Winter crop stubble 68 49 35 25

Perennials 86 57 45 31
Wild land 90 71 52 39
Ashen-gray
soil Winter crop stubble 66 47 34 26
Perennials 74 56 43 30
Wild land 92 71 50 40
Chestnut soil Winter crop stubble 69 47 36 22
Wild land 98 58 55 29
Alkaline soil Winter crop stubble - 82 73 65
B = 30 ( A x P), where
B – operation plough width, m;
A – tillage depth, m;
P- specific resistance, KN/m2.
7.6.2.1. Wheels arrangement when 5…8 ploughs are mounted
Tractor wheels are in furrow
Furrow wall
To calculate wheel track, add width of the corresponding tire contour to dimensions A and B.
Tractor wheels are off the furrow
Furrow wall
Rear wheels track is in accordance with doubling scheme
_______________________________
*) Size “A” should be 1220 mm minimum to avoid damage of rear wheels.
7.6.2.2. Field grading when using ordinary ploughs
First passage Third passage

Second passage
Only three last plough The right tractor wheel is in
The right tractor wheel is in
shares operate. The last the first furrow after the
the furrow. The first share
share ploughs at about half second passage. The plough
plaoughs at half the depth,
the normal ploughing depth. the last one – at full depth. is set at half the depth of the
first share, thus resulting in
level surface. The last share
is set to full length.
Ploughing completion
During the last passage

ploughing is made to full
length, leaving the field
untilled by 1-2 furrows.
During the last passage two
first shares till two
remaining furrows, and the
last rear share ploughs
already tilled soil by half
the depth.
7.7. TRANSPORT WORKS

The use of TCD-1 (crosspiece) is strictly
Practically half of tractor operation time is forbidden due to safety consideration.
used for transportation and travelling on Trailers or semi-trailers-type machines must
public roads. Due to this, transport MTA need bear sign of maximum speed limit of MTA,
to comply with stringent safety regulations. attached to rear left side.
According to GOST, machines like tractor Safety chains (steel ropes) are fixed to the
trailers or half-trailers should be equipped tractor in one openings 24 mm in diameter,
with main and parking brakes and safety provided in the lifting device guard arm (
chains (steel ropes). Main brakes are driven fastening fixtures are included in the kit of
according to one-wire scheme and controlled mounted machine).
from operator’s work place of the power unit. The tractor can be ganged up as part of road
The parking brake drive must be installed on train (tractor + semi-trailer + trailer) only for
the machine. dry hard-surface roads and 4% maximum
Transport means are coupled by means of grade.
TCD –2P or TCD-3V (lifting device). Overall dimension of MTA travelling on
public roads should not exceed 2.5 m in width
and 3.8 m in height.
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual. Section 7. Ganging up
In case of deviation from these

requirement, agreement of traffic police
is required
To connect signal alarm devices of mounted
IMPORTANT! For transport works on machines, tractor has connector for power
hard-surface roads increase air pressure supply of the mounted machine according to
in tires by 30 Kpa ( 0.3 kgs/cm2) over GOST and ISO.
recommended values. Travel on public roads only forward.
Movement in reverse is not allowed, as
light alarm signals are arranged only for
forward movement.
7.8. SELECTING MOVEMENT SPEED
Table 7-18
Operation Tractor features Speed, km/h, Notes
max
Operation on slopes 10
Sharp MTA turns 10
MTA transportation to
operation site (except
transport vehicles) 20 Public roads
MTA transfer ( from one Mortar in tires 20 With no travel on
field to another) Double tires 20 public roads
Double tires 20
Transport works TCD-2P, TCD- On public roads
3V
Transport movement speed may be limited by slope and roads conditions. Accounting for
coupled machine capabilities according to allowed longitudinal slope of 12 degrees, total
sign imprinted on it. mass of a semi-trailer (trailer) must not
Load carrying capacity of a transport vehicle exceed 12000 kg, for relatively level terrain –
depends on terrain, 14000…15000 kg.
7.9. REVERSE MODE OPERATION
A number of activities (fodder, sugar-beat the harvesting complex, ganged up by means

harvesting, etc) require MTA movement on of front towing mechanism, including when
the field being harvested. In this case front loads are installed, or cross-piece on
fulfillment of technological operations in the suspension axle of the front mounting
reverse mode justify additional expenses, as mechanism MD –2.
mounted and semi-mounted machines ( Readjustment to reverse mode and visa versa
reapers, combines, etc) are used. A trailer for takes 3…4 minutes.
grind vegetation may be included as part of
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual. Section 8. Tractor transportation
8. TRANSPORTATION AND TOWING OF TRACTOR
Tractors can be transported by rail road, Fix steel ropes to front axle beam and half-
trucks and trailers, as well as by towing, or axles of rear wheels, as shown in the diagram
under its own power. below.
When transporting the tractor: Tractor can be towed with non-operational
 shift GB lever to gear 1; HTDS pump at speed of 10 km/h maximum
 engage parking-reserve brake; and for distance of up to 10 km/h.
 fasten tractor to platform using wire with To connect towing steel rope, use an eyelet
3…5 mm diameter, chains, tension fixed to front ballast and loads arm.
members. Strictly observe traffic regulations when
During tractor loading-unloading use lifting towing the tractor.
mechanisms having load carrying capacity at
least 10 tons.
Diagram of tractor slinging

MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual Section 9. Maintenance
9. SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE  If hydraulic mounting system operates

under high loads (or with hydraulics –
Operator must daily examine tractor to fitted agricultural machinery), and is
prevent fixing loosening, cooling fluid and oil filled-in with oil of unidentified origin,
leaks, clean tractor mechanisms, as well as interval of filtering elements replacement
regularly make scheduled preventive should be shortened.
maintenance to provide its operation ability,
fire safety and safety of operation as part Remember, that pureness of oil in hydraulic
machine-tractor assembly. systems is guarantee of its trouble-free
operation.
Instruction for operation and maintenance
of RMD and HTDS hydraulic systems: Filling-in tanks, l
Table 9-1
 In the process of maintaining hydraulic Diesel oil
systems of the mounting mechanism and crankcase/lubrication 18/22
steering control, strictly observe intervals system
of oil and filters replacement. Do not use Diesel cooling system
oil for filling-in (re-filling), that is not (OZH-40, OZH-65 or 36
mentioned in recommendations of tractor Tosol A 40M
operation manuals. Transmission 45
 Before filling-in and replacing filtering
elements, clean fill-in plugs, necks, filter Fuel pump*) 0.25
covers and adjacent surfaces off dirt and
FDA reduction gear 2.0
dust. When replacing filtering elements
(each)
rinse inside surfaces of filter bodies and
covers with diesel fuel. Hydraulic system oil tank 35
 When ganging up with hydraulics-fitted HTDS oil tanks 6
agricultural machines, carefully clean
Fuel tanks ( two tanks) 357
clutches, adapters, connecting pipes and
other elements of the tractor and
agricultural machinery. *) when new or repaired oil pump
is installed.
9.1 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHART

Table 9-2
# Interval, hours
of 10 125 250 500 100 2
Description
op 0 0
er. 0
0
1 Check oil level in the diesel X
2 Check level of diesel cooling fluid X
3 Check oil level in transmission X
4 Check oil level in HTDS oil tank X
5 Check oil level in RMD hydraulic system oil tank X
6 Check braking fluid level in tanks of main X

cylinders of clutch and brakes hydraulic drive
7 Drain condensate from pneumatic system cylinder X
8 Check brakes operation on the move, diesel X

operation, steering, illumination and alarm devices
9 Lubricate joints of steering hydraulic cylinders X
10 Lubricate bearings of FDA axle pivots X
11 Check front wheels toe-in X
12 Drain sediment from fuel tanks and fuel coarse

filter
13 Check generator belt tension x
Check air pressure in tires X
14
15 Check and adjust clutch control mechanism X
16 Make service of diesel air purifier X
17 Crease bearings of clutch shifter X
18 Clean rotors of centrifugal oil filters of diesel and X
19 gear box
20 Rinse meshed filter of transmission hydraulic X
system
21 Change oil in diesel crankcase X
*
22 Replace filtering element of diesel oil filter X
23 Check tension of wheels fixing nuts X
24 Check oil level in front PTO reduction gear (if X
installed)
25 Check oil level in axle beam and reduction gears X
of FDA finite gears
26 Check and adjust clearances of diesel valves X
27 Check steering wheel backlash X

28 Drain sediment from fuel fine filter X
29 Check tension of bolts fastening of turbo X
compressor to exhaust pipe arm and outlet collector
30 Check clearances in bearings of FDA reduction X
gears flanges
31 Adjust travel of brake pedals and parking-reserve X
brake lever
32 Make service of storage batteries X
33 Replace filtering element of RMD hydraulic system X
oil filter
34 Replace filtering element of HTDS oil filter X
35 Check tension of generator fixing bolts X
36 Clean filtering element pneumatic system pressure X
regulator
37 Check air-tightness of connections between air X
purifier and diesel inlet duct
38 Check pneumatic system air-tightness X
39 Clean filter of cabin ventilation and heating system X
40 Change oil in oil tank of RMD hydraulic system X
41 Check and adjust bearings of FDA finite gear X
reduction gear
42 Check bolts tension of fastening diesel cylinder X
heads
43 Check tension of outside bolt connections X
44 Clean fuel coarse filter X
45 Rinse diesel turbo compressor X
46 Change oil in transmission X
47 Change oil in HTDS oil tank X
48 Change filtering element of fuel fine filter X
49 Check generator X
50 Change oil in FDA body X
51 Change oil in front PTO reduction gear(if installed) X
52 Check state of brakes X
53 Lubricate bushings of rotation shaft of rear (front) X
hinge and towing mechanism
54 Check backlash in goints of steering tie-rod (FDA x
with two steering wheel hydraulic cylinders)
55 Check fuel system X
56 Check technical state of the starter X
57 Rinse diesel breathers X
58 Rinse diesel cooling system x
MTZ 2022/2022V –Operation manual Section 9. Maintenance
9.2. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Operator must daily examine tractor to CAUTION! Make sure mask (1)
prevent fixing loosening, cooling fluid and oil and hood (2) are securely fixed in
leaks, clean tractor mechanisms, and do other raised position.
preventive works to provide tractor operation
ability, its fire safety, and safety of operation
as part of machine-tractor assembly.
CAUTION! Before starting tractor repair or

maintenance, shut down diesel and brake the
tractor by parking-reserve brake.
If in the process of works protective shields
were removed, make sure to reinstall them
upon works completion.
Never drain used oil on the ground. Use
special reservoirs for its collection and
storage. When changing oil, drain it straight
after operation, until it gets cold.
To check oil level put tractor on level
horizontal site.
Before starting maintenance works, take off 1 – mask, 2 – hood, 3 – hood side panel.
side panels, and raise engine hood. To this
end:
 pull back lower front mask section (1), lift
it and fix in the raised position with
supporting tie-rod;
 press down catch handle and take off left
and right-side panels (3);
 pull back handle of hood lock on the left
side of tractor, raise hood (2) and fix it in
raised position with by placing tie-rod in
fixing arm opening.
MTZ 2022/2022V- Operation manual Section 9. Maintenance
9.3. OPERATIONS OD SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
9.3.1. After each 10 hours of operation, or

daily
Operation 1. Checking diesel oil level.
Shut down diesel, wait for 3..5 minutes and

check oil level. Oil level should be between
upper and lower marks of dip stick (3). If
necessary, remove cover (2) of oil-filling neck
(1) and fill-up oil to upper mark of dip stick
(3).
Operation 2. Checking cooling fluid level
Remove plug (1) of expansion tank (2) and

fill up cooling fluid to level “max” © on level
indicator (3). Put plug (1) in place.
CAUTION! Do not allow fluid level

dropping below mark “min” (0). Do not fill
up the cooling system with water!
Operation 3. Checking oil level in

transmission
Visually check oil level on indicator (3),

situated on the right side of transmission. Oil
level should not be lower than 10 mm from
mark “P”. If necessary, remove plug of oil-
filling neck and refill oil to mark “P”. Normal
oil level is about 0.5 mm from mark “P”.
Operation 4. Checking oil level in HTDS oil

tank
- put tractor on a level horizontal site and shut

down diesel;
MTZ 2022/2022V –operation manual Section 9. Maintenance
- Check oil level on oil measuring stick (1);

- Oil level should be between upper and
lower marks on the measuring stick;
- Remove plug (2) of oil filling neck and
top oil up the upper mark.
- Put plug in place.
Operation 5. Check oil level in hydraulic

system oil tank
Check oil level in oil tank (2) on oil

measuring stick (3).
Oil pressure should be between marks “0” and
“P” of the oil measuring stick. If necessary,
remove plug (1) off oil filling neck and top oil
up mark “P” on oil measuring stick, and in
this case RMD should be in end lower
position.
NOTE When tractor operates with

machines that require increased oil take
off, refill oil to mark “C” on oil measuring
stick with hydraulic cylinders of the
mounted machine drawn in.
Operation 6. Checking fluid level in tanks

of hydraulic drives of clutch and main
brakes
Visually check fluid level in tank (4) of clutch

master cylinder ( on the left side as tractor
moves), and tanks (1,2) of brakes master
cylinders ( on the right side as tractor moves).
Fluid level should be between marks “min”
and “max” imprinted on tanks’ housing. If
necessary, full up liquid “Neva” ( TU 6-01-
34-93) to marks “max”, having unscrewed
covers (3) first.
To control fluid level in tanks (1,2) of main

brakes master cylinders, in cover of one of
cylinders sensor (5) for braking fluid level is
installed.
CAUTION! Filling in the system with

fluids of other grades can lead to
malfunctioning of hydraulic drives of clutch
and main brakes control.
MTZ 2022/2022V Operation manual Section 9. Maintenance
Operation 7. Removing condensate from

pneumatic system cylinder
To remove condensate fron cylinder pull ring

(1) to any side, and if compressed air
available, keep it this way until condenaste is
fully released.
Operation 8. Checking serviceability of

diesel, steering, brakes, illumination and
alarm systems
- Diesel should reliably operate in all

modes.
- Controls, light and sound alarm
instruments should be in running order.
- Left and right-side main brakes must
operate in synchronism.
3.3.2. Within each 125 operation hours

fulfill previous maintenance operations plus
the following:
Operation 9. Lubrication of joints of

steering hydraulic cylinders
Using grease gun, grease joints via oil cups

with grease “Litol –24” or Behem LCP –G4 (
4 greasing points for two steering control
hydraulic cylinders, 2 greasing points for two-
rod hydraulic cylinder).
Operation 10. Lubricating bearings of

lower and upper axles of reduction gear
rod in finite FDA gear
* Lubricate oil cups (2) with grease “Litol –

24 or “Behem LCP –GM” by making 4…6
injections (4 lubrication points)
Operation 11. Checking front wheels toe-in
Front wheels toe-in should be within

0…8mm.
If necessary, make adjustment as shown on
page 216 (item 9.4.3).
Operation 12. Drain of sediment from fuel

tanks and fuel coarse filters
Unscrew plugs (2, 4) and drain from fuel

tanks (1) and filter (3) correspondingly, until
pure fuel appears. Screw plugs up.
Operation 13. Generator belt tension
Belt tension is thought to be normal, if

sagging on the side: crankshaft pulley-
generator pulley is within 29…33 mm when
pressed with force 40 N (4 kgs). To adjust
belt tension, loosen generator fastening.
Adjust belt tension by shifting generator
body. Tighten bolt of bar fastening and nuts
of generator fixing bolts.
Operation 14. Checking air pressure in

tires
Air pressure in tires of front and rear wheels

should be within 100…160 kPa
And 80…160 kPa correspondingly,
depending on the type of works being
performed. If necessary, bring pressure in
tires to normal.
Operation 15. Adjusting mechanism of

clutch control
Follow the following sequence to adjust
mechanism of clutch control:
 loosen check nut (1), remove cotter pin
and pull out pin (2);
 turn lever (3) anti clockwise to the end of
pressure bearing up to squeeze levers,
and turning yoke (4), align openings of
lever and yoke. After that tighten yoke by
5.5 turns and connect to lever by way of
pin (2);
 put parts back in place in the reverse
order; secure the yoke and put aside cotter
pin ends.
Operation 16. Maintaining air purifier
Use clogging indicator to control clogging of

air purifier filtering elements. With high
degree of clogging the signal lamp on the
instrument panel of the box of control lamps
lights. Make servicing of the air purifier in the
following sequence:
 push forward hood mask in front of the
tractor to get access to air purifier ;
 pull back catch (1) (yellow color), turn
cover (2) anti clockwise by 12.5 0 and
remove it;
 remove main filtering element (3);
 check control filtering element (CFE) for
dirt, without taking it out off the body.
- Assembly the air purifier in the reverse

CAUTION! Removal of CFE from the body sequence.
is not recommended. -
Soiling of CFE testifies to the fact, that MFE NOTE: When operating in very dusty
is damaged (breakage of paper curtain, conditions, check state of MFE after each
ungluing of the bottom). In this case rinse 20 hours of tractor operation.
CFE and replace MFE.
- Blow over the main filtering element with CAUTION! After assembly of the air
compressed air, first from inside and then purifier check air tightness of all outlet
from outside to remove dust. To avoid duct connections. To this end, start the
breakage of the paper curtain, air pressure diesel and at average frequency of diesel
should not exceed 0.2 – 0.3 mPa (2-3 crankshaft rotation shut air purifier pipe.
kgs/cm 2). Diesel must stop fast. If not, find out the
Air jet should be directed at an angle to cause and correct it.
filtering element surface. During servicing the
filtering element must be protected from
mechanical damage and oiling. - Reinstall the hood mask.
When compressed air blow over of soiled or
oily filtering element proves to be inefficient,
rinse it in soap paste solution OP-7 or OP-10
and water, heated to temperature of 40-50 0C.
Solution is made of 20 g of paste per one liter
of water. If paste is not available, one can use
solution of household detergents of the same
concentration.
To rinse the element, submerge it in soap
solution for half an hour, then rinse
intensively for 15 minutes, then rinse in pure
water heated to 35-45 0 C and let it dry out for
24 hours. Do not use open flame and air with
temperature over + 70 0 C for drying.
Operation 17. Lubricating bearing of

clutch shifter
Unscrew plug (1) on the left-side of the clutch

housing, insert in the opening the tip of lever-
plunger injector and via shifter grease cup
make four-six injections. Place plug (1) in
place.
9.3.3. within each 250 hours of operation

fulfill operations of the previous maintenance
plus do the following:
Operations 18, 19. Cleaning rotors of

centrifugal oil filters of diesel and gear box,
correspondingly
Unscrew nut (1) and remove cup (2). Using

wrench (4) and screwdriver (5) remove rotor
cup (3). Remove cover (6), impeller (7) and
filter (8). Rinse meshed filter in diesel fuel.
Scrape sediment off inside walls of rotor cup
(3)
Grease rubber sealing ring with motor oil.
During assembly align marks on the cup and
rotor housing. Torque nut (1) to 35…50 Nm.
CAUTION! Diesel and gear box filters

function properly, if upon shut down of
heated diesel, from under filters’ caps light
noise of rotating rotors is heard.
Operation 20. Rinsing meshed filter of gear

box hydraulic system.
 Unscrew rotating elbow bolt (12), remove

two rings (13), having disconnected oil
conduit (11) from cover (1);
 Unscrew cover (1) of meshed filter and
using clamp (4) pull out filter in assembly.
- Disassembly filter by sequentially

unscrewing check nut (2) and clamp (4)
with pin (9). Remove washer (1), spring
(6), piston (5), sealing ring (7) and
filtering elements (8).
- Carefully rinse elements in diesel fuel
until dirt is fully removed;
- Assembly filter in reverse order, paying
attention to rings (7) being installed on
both sides of filtering elements set.
ATTENTION! Screw clamp (4) upon pin

(9) until washer (10) is flush with piston
end face (5).
- Connect oil conduit (11) to cover (1),

having installed rings (13) and bolt (18).
Operation 21*) Changing oil in diesel

crankcase
 Heat diesel up to normal operation
temperature (700 C minimum).
 Put tractor on plane surface, shut down
diesel and brake tractor.
 Remove cover (2) of oil-filling neck and
unscrew drain cock (4). Drain oil in
proper reservoir for oil storage.
 Put drain plug in place, and through oil
filling neck (1) fill in fresh motor oil
HESSOL TURBO DIESEL SAE 15W-40
(API CF-) up to the upper mark of oil
measuring stick (3)
 Put oil-filling neck cover (2) in place.
 Start diesel and let it operate for 1-2
minutes.
 Using dip stick (3) check oil level, as
described in operation 1.
 If necessary, top oil up to level.
*) Within each 125 hours of operation when

using motor oils M-8G 2; M-8G 2K, M-10G 2,
M-4 3 08G 2.
MTZ 2022/2022V-Operation manual Section 9. Maintenance
Operation 22*) Replacing PFE of diesel oil

filter (do at the same time with oil change):
 Unscrew cap (5) with paper filtering

element (6) as an assembly.
 Unscrew nut (1) and remove bottom (2)
with washers (3 and (9).
 Press clamping (4) having pushed it inside
the cap (5) by 3…4 mm, and than rotate it
to align three projections of clamping (4)
with cap grooves (5)
 Remove clamping , PFE, relief valve,
spring (8).
 Rinse all parts with diesel fuel.
 Install new filtering element in reverse
order. If required, replace washers (3) and
(9). Torque nut (1) to 30…40 Nm. Grease
nut (9) with motor oil.
 Screw filter as an assembly additionally
by ¾ of turn after washer (9) touches body
(10).
CAUTION! Screw filter in only manually

by grasping filter cap (5).
Operation 23. Checking tightness of wheels

fastening nuts
Check and, if necessary, torque wheels

tightening nuts to:
- front wheels – 280…320 Nm;
- front wheels ( disc – rim) – 160…200
Nm;
- rear wheels – 700…750 Nm.
Operation 24. Checking oil level in front

PTO reduction gear (if installed)
Unscrew plug (1) of control-fill-in opening (

on the right-side of the reduction gear
housing). Oil level should reach threaded plug
opening.
*) Within each 125 hours of operation if

motor oils complying with GOST are used.
Operation 25. Checking oil level in beam

and reduction gears of final FDA drives
Check oil level:

 In crankcase of final reduction gears’
drives. If required, fill-in oil to the level of
control-fill-in opening, closed with plug
(2).
 In front drive axle beam. If required, fill-
in oil to the level of control – fill-in
opening, closed with plug (1).
Grades of oils being filled-in:

- transmission oils: Tap 15V, TAD-17, or
their analogues.
9.3.4. Within each 500 hours of operation

fulfill previous, maintenance operations plus
the following:
Operation 26. Checking and adjusting

clearances in diesel valves
Check and adjust clearances also after

cylinders’ head is removed, fastening bolts
are fastened, and valves start chattering.
NOTE: Check clearances with diesel cold,

having checked tightening of bolts of
cylinders’ heads in advance.
 remove caps of cylinders heads’ covers..

 check bolts and nuts tightening used for
fastening of rocker axles posts ( 60…90
Nm).
 Rotate crankshaft until valves in the first
cylinder overlap ( inlet valve starts
opening, and discharge valve terminates
closing).
 Adjust clearances in valves 3, 5, 7, 10, 11
and 12 ( numbering starts from the fan).
 To adjust clearance, loosen check nut (1)
CAUTION! Clearances size between end
of adjustment screw (2) and set required
faces of valves’ rods (5) and heads of
clearance by clearance gauge (3) using a
rockers (4) should be 0.25…030 mm for
wrench and a screwdriver. After clearance
inlet valves, and 0.40…0.45 mm for
is set, tighten check nut (1) check
discharge valves.
clearance anew using a clearance gauge.
 Having completed adjustments, put
* Rotate crankshaft by 360 p, having set removed parts in place.
overlap in cylinder6, and adjust clearances in
valves 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 and 9.
Operation 27. Checking backlash of

steering
When steering backlash, exceeding 25p,

appears, eliminate backlash in joints of
steering trapezoid, tighten nut of turn levers,
eliminate backlash in steering column and
steering drive.
Operation 28. Drain of sediment from fuel

fine filter
Turn plug (1) by 2…3 turns (plug (3) for in-

line fuel pump) of air outlet.
- One by one unscrew cocks (2) of filter
caps (cock (4) for in-line fuel pump
diesel) and drain sediment until pure fuel
comes out.
- Tighten cocks and bleed-in the fuel
system (operation 48).
Operation 29. Checking tightening of

fastening bolts and the exhaust pipe arm to
diesel exhaust manifold
Check tightening of bolts (2) for fastening of

turbo compressor (1) and exhaust pipe (3) to
exhaust manifold. If required, torque bolts to
35…40 N.m (3.5…4.0 kgs.cm). No loosening
of fastening is allowed.
Operation 30. Checking clearances in

bearings of FDA reduction gear flange
Check and, if required, adjust coned roller

bearings (1, 3) of flange (4) without clearance
using nut (2). Tighten the nut in order to
chose clearance and secure it in two flange
slots.
Operation 31. Adjusting travel of brake

pedals and parking-reserve brake lever
(See section 5.8)
Operation 32. Servicing storage batteries
 To get access to SB and ground switch,

push forward hood mask.
 Clean batteries of dust and dirt.
 Remove plugs of filling-in openings of
storage batteries, check electrolyte level
and density in each cell jar; if required,
add distilled water to raise electrolyte
level to over protective grid by 12…15
mm, or between control marks on CAUTION! The battery contains sulphuric
transparent battery body. acid, that causes burns when in contact with
 Check state of terminals (2) of output rods skin, eyes or clothes.
and ventilation openings in plugs. If When acids is in contact with outside bode
required, grease terminals with technical parts, rinse them profusely with pure water,
vaseline and clean ventilation openings in if it gets inside – drink big amount of water
plugs. or milk. When acid contacts eyes, wash the
profusely with pure water for 15 minutes
and then consult a doctor.
Do not allow sparkle or flame in electrolyte
zone – this may lead to explosion. Charge
batteries in well-aired room. To service
battery use goggles and gloves.
Operation 33. Changing filtering element

of hydraulic system oil filter
 Unscrew bolts (1) and remove cover (2) in
assembly with valve (4) and plug (3);
 Pull out filtering element (5);
 Clean inside body cavity (6)having
disconnected hose (7) in advance;
 Install new filtering element, put in place
cover in assembly and tighten bolts.
Connect hose (7).
Operation 34. Replacing PFE of HTDS oil

filter
 Unscrew four bolts (4) and remove cover

(2) with filtering element and cup in
assembly;
 Unscrew two bolts (3) and disconnect
filtering element from the cup;
 Clean the inside cup cavity;
 Install new filtering element and assembly
cover with filter elements an cup in
assembly, having fixed them by bolts (3);
 Put filter element inside oil tank and
tighten bolts (4);
 Check oil level and, if required, refill,
having removed plug (1).
Operation 35. Checking tightness of

generator fastening bolts
Check generator off dust and soil. Check

fastening bolts tightness, reliability of fixing
electric wiring contacts.
CAUTION! Next change PFE after

each 1000 hours of operation.
Operation 36. Cleaning filtering element of
the pneumatic system pressure regulator
 Unscrew bolts (1);

 Remove cover (2) and pull out filtering
element (3);
 Rinse filtering element in washing
solution and blow over with compressed
air;
 Assembly filtering element in reverse
order.
Operation 37. Checking air-tightness of air

purifier connection to inlet duct (after each  remove panel (2) and pull out filter (3);
125 hours of operation)  shake dust out of filter by light knocks.
 start the diesel; To check air tightness of charged air cooling

 set average idle run speed; system between turbo charger and diesel
 shut inlet pipe to air purifier. Diesel must output manifold:
stop;  Set maximum speed of diesel idle run;
 if the diesel keeps on functioning, find out  Put soap solution in places, where hoses
and correct non-tightness of connection and air ducts are connected;
between air purifier and inlet duct.  Find out and correct non-tightness of
connections;
Operation 38. Checking air-tightness of
pneumatic system
Air pressure in the pneumatic system within

30 minutes should not drop by more than 0.2
MPa (20 kPa ), with free position brakes
steering and switched off compressor.
Air pressure in the cylinder, sustained by
regulator, should be 0.65…0.80 Mpa (
650…800 kPa)
Operation 39. Cleaning filter of cabin

ventilation and heating (after each 125
hours of operation)
CAUTION! With high ambient humidity,

before filter cleaning, do not switch on the
fan, as it’s difficult to remove dust from wet
paper filtering element.
Filtering elements of the ventilation system Take care not to damage paper filtering
are installed on both sides of the tractor cabin. element!
 To get access to the filter place a platform
or small ladder;
 Unscrew two screws (1) with plastic
heads under extended edge of cabin roof;
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual Section 9 Maintenance.
 Put filter in place, fulfilling operation in
 Clean filter by compressed air under the reverse order. Repeat operations and
pressure of 1 MPa maximum. Not to clean filter on the other tractor side.
damage paper filtering element keep the
hose tip not closer than 300 mm away NOTE: When tractor operates in very
from filter. Direct air jet through the filter dusty conditions, clean filter after 8-10
opposite to normal air flow movement, hours of operation, i.e., each shift.
indicated by arrows, imprinted on the
filter.
Operation 40. Changing oil in the oil tank

of RMD hydraulic system
After oil in the hydraulic system oil tank

reaches operation temperature:
 unscrew plug (2) of the fill-in neck;
 unscrew cock (1) in the drain opening and
drain oil out of oil tank in a special vessel;
 screw cock (1) up, fill in fresh oil to mark
“F” of oil indicator (3), put plug (2) in
place.
Operation 41. Checking/adjusting

reduction gear bearings of FDA final drive
1. Bearings (1, 9) of drive gear (2) should

have backlash not more than 0.05 mm. If
necessary, make adjustment by changing
the number of cut washers (4) between
cup (3) and the housing.
2. Bearings (8, 10) of pin axles (6, 11)
should be tight. If necessary, make
following adjustments:
 Unscrew four bolts (5) and screw two of
them in dismantling openings in axle (6)
to shift out axle and release spacers (7);
 Take off needed number of spacers and
put axle (6) in place, having tightened
bolts (5). Tightness of bearings should be
such, that cam rotation force applied to
flange (12), was within 60-80 N;

9.3.5. After each 1000 hours of operation

fulfill operation of the previous maintenance
Operation 42. Checking bolts tightness of

two diesel cylinder heads
With diesel heated up, tighten bolts in the

following sequence:
 remove caps and covers of cylinder heads;
 remove rocker axles together with rockers
and posts;
 using torque wrench, check tightness of
all bolts that fix cylinder heads, in the
order shown in figure to the right. Torque
must be within 190…210 N.m (19…21
kgs.m).
After bolts are tightened, put axle of rockers

in place, check and, if necessary, adjust
clearances between valves and rockers ( see
operation 26).
Operation 43. Checking tightness of

outside bolted connections
Check tightness and, if required, tighten

outside bolted connections: front and rear
wheels, fastening of front wings’ arms, front
beam semi-frame; diesel – clutch housing; ;
clutch housing – gear box housing; gear box
housing – rear axle housing; rear axle housing
– upper cover; rear and front cabin supports;
nuts of front drive axle; bolts of cardan shaft
flanges; bolts of half-axles’ housings.
Operation 44. Cleaning fuel coarse filter
 Clean the outside filter surface, unscrew

nuts (1) for cup fixing; remove cup (3),
unscrew deflector (2) with mesh. Remove
scatterer.
 Rinse deflector with mesh, scatterer and
cup inside cavity in diesel fuel.
 Assembly filter in reverse order and bleed
off fuel system ( see operation 48).
Operation 45. Rinsing turbo compressor
Take turbo compressor off diesel and without

dismantling it, submerge in kerosine or diesel
fuel for two hours, than blow over with
compressed air and put in place.
Operation 46. Changing oil in transmission
1. Operate the tractor and heat oil in

transmission.
2. Remove plug (1) of fill-in neck, situated
on the clutch body on the right side;
3. Unscrew drain cocks (1) of the
transmission and cocks (3) of half-axle
hoses;
4. Drain oil from transmission housing into
vessel intended for oil collection;
5. Put drain cocks in place and fill in fresh
oil up to mark “F” on the oil indicator (see
operation 3). Put plug (2) in place.
6. Operate the tractor for 5…10 min and
check oil level. If necessary, fill in up to
level.
Operation 47. Changing oil in HTDS oil

tank
_ Heat oil in HTDS hydraulic system.
CAUTION! Take care not to get burnt

when in contact with hot oil.
 Put tractor on horizontal terrain.

 Remove plug (2) of filling-in neck and
drain cock (3). Drain oil in vessel for used
oil. Dispose of oil correctly.
 Put drain cock in place and fill in fresh oil
Hessol Bechem Staroil #32 Hydraulikoil
up to upper mark level on oil measuring
stick (1). Put plug of filling in neck in
place.
Operation 48. Changing filtering elements

of fuel fine filter
 Unscrew filters (1) in assembly.

 Disassembly each filter (1), having
fulfilled the following operations:
- remove nut (5), bottom (3) with rings (2)
and (4);
- pressing clamping (6) sink it inside cap
(8) by 3..4 mm and rotate until three
extensions of the clamping aligned with
outlet cap grooves;
- take clamping, PFE (7) and spring (9) out
of the cap;
- rinse inside cavities of caps, and all filter
parts in diesel fuel.
 Replace filtering elements for new ones

and assembly filtering elements in the
reverse order.
 Check state of rings (2) and (4) and, if
needed, replace them.
 Torque nut (5) to 30-40 N.m.
 Grease ring (4) with motor oil and screw
each filter by ¾ of turn after ring touches  Place new filtering element.
filter body.  Screw cover (3) up.
 Put cover and fixing nuts.
IMPORTANT! Screw filters in assembly
 Open fuel tank valve and fill in the system
(1) inside the body only by hand.
with fuel.
For diesel with in-line fuel pump:
 Unscrew cock (3) and drain sediment out.
 Unscrew four nuts and remove cover (1).
 Remove from the body and discard
filtering element (2).
 Rinse body and cover with pure diesel
fuel.
 Check cover sealing and, if necessary,
replace it.
Release air from the fuel system, having * Bleed fuel system off by manual pump (2),
fulfilled the following operations: turn by turn screwing up ( when fuel without
 Unscrew plug (5) by 2…3 turns to release air bulbs comes out) plug (3) on fine filter,
air from fuel pump (1), installed on the then plug (5) on the fuel pump. Screw up
block of cylinders’ side. lever (2) of manual pumping.
 Unscrew plug (3) by 2…3 turns on body
(4) of fuel fine filters
Operation 49. Checking generator
Take driving belt (1) off pulley (2) of the

generator, and check rotation smoothness and
backlash in rotor bearings. If rotor has
backlash and jams, remove generator and
send for repair to a workshop.
Operation 50. Changing oil in FDA bodies
 Operate the tractor and heat up oil in FDA

bodies.
 Put tractor on plane horizontal terrain.
Engage parking brake and lock wheels on
both sides with wedges.
 Remove control-fill-in plugs (2, 3) and
drain cocks (1, 4). Drain oil in special
vessels for used oil. Dispose of oil
correctly.
 Put drain cocks (1, 4) in place, and tighten
them.
 Fill in reduction gears’ body and FDA
beams with fresh transmission oil Tap-
15V or TAD-17 up to the lower rim of
control- filling-in openings ( see "filling- NOTE: Also change oil during seasonal
in tanks"). maintenance
 Put plugs (2, 3) in place and tighten them.
Operation 51. Changing oil in front PTO

reduction gear (if installed)
Unscrew plug (2) and drain used oil. Fill-in

fresh oil Tap-15V, or TAD-17i to the level of
control-filling-in opening (1). (Filling-in
reduction gear tank (4, 4a)).
Operation 52. Checking state of brakes
Check main brakes for oil leaks on brake

cover spacer and drive roller sealing ring. If
required, replace worn-out parts and tighten
fixing bolts.
Check and, if required, adjust travel of main
brake pedals (see 5.8.4. “Adjustment of
brakes”).
Operation 53. Lubricating rotating shaft

bushings of rear (front) mounting and
towing mechanism
Clean two oil cups (1) situated on rear axle

cover bosses, and also oil cup (2) of towing
device. Lubricate them under pressure until
grease comes out of clearances.
Operation 54. Checking backlash in joints if

steering tie-rod (if FDA with two hydraulic
cylinders of steering control is installed)
With operational diesel, rotate steering wheel

to both sides to check free travel and backlash
in joints (1) of steering tie-rod (4).
If there is backlash in joints, do the following
operations:
 untie securing wire (3);
 screw up threaded plug (2) in a way to
eliminate clearance in joint connection;
 secure plug with wire (3).
NOTE: If backlash in joints is not

eliminated by tightening of threaded plugs,
disassembly the joint and replace worn-out
parts.
9.3.6. After each 2000 hours of operation
fulfil operation of the previous maintenance
Operation 55. Checking fuel equipment
To check nozzles for injection pressure,

dismantle them from the engine, having
fulfilled the following operations:
 Unscrew coupling nuts (5) of fuel pump
and nozzles’ couplings;
 Remove high pressure pipes (6);
 Take off coupling nuts (1) from each
nozzle together with sealing washers, and
remove drain pipeline (2);
 Unscrew nozzles fastening bolts (4) and
remove nozzles (3);
 Send nozzles to specialized workshop or
dealer to be checked and adjusted.
NOTE: Pressure of nozzle injection should

be 22…23 MPa The spray should be in the
form of fog, with no continuos jets and
leaks.
Angles of fuel injection start for diesels D—

260.4 AND d-260.4C, equipped with fuel
pumps YAZDA, or Motopal, should
correspond to those given in table to the right.
To check and adjust fuel pump, dismantle it
from the diesel and send to specialized Angles of fuel injection start ( degrees)
workshop.
Diesel
D-260.4 D-260.4C
Fuel pump
YAZD Motopal YAZDA Motopa
A l
19…21 21…23 16…18 17…19
Operation 56. Checking technical state of

the starter
Unscrew screws (1) and remove cover (2).

Check state of collector (3), brush elements,
easiness with which brushes (5) move in
brush holders, and pressure of springs (4) on
brushes.
Working collector surface must be clean
Pressure of brushes should be within
750…1000 gs.
If collector is appreciably worn out or burnt,
send starter to specialized workshop for
repair.
Operation 57. Rinsing diesel breathers
 Remove breathes bodies (1);

 Pull out breathers from their bodies;
 Rinse breathers in diesel fuel and blow
over with compressed air;
 Assembly breathers and put them in place.
Operation 58. Rinsing diesel cooling system
 Make ready solution of caustic soda (50-

60 g of soda per liter of water);
 Add 2 liters of kerosine in the water
solution, and then fill in the system with
prepared solution;
 Start diesel and let it operate for 8-10
hours;
 Drain solution in proper reservoir, rinse
the system with pure water and fill in as
recommended in the present manual.
9.4. MINTENANCE AS THE NEED

ARISES
Operation 9.4.1. Adjusting oil pressure in
diesel lubrication system
If oil pressure in the lubrication system of the

heated diesel at rated frequency of crankshaft
rotation is below 0.28 MPa, stop the diesel
and correct malfunction. Check oil conduit
tightness and serviceability of safety valve in
the oil paper filter. One of the ways to raise
pressure is fine adjustment of the filter safety
valve in a specialized workshop.
Operation 9.4.2. Adjusting safety valve of

gear box centrifuge
Valve (2) sustains oil pressure in GB

hydraulic system in the range of 0.9… 1.0
MPa.
If pressure drops below the given value, make
fine adjustment of the valve by placing
additional washers (5) between spring (3) and
plug (6).
IMPORTANT! If pressure drops below 0.7

MPa, stop tractor and address a mechanic.
Valve (7) sustains oil pressure in front of

centrifuge rotor. It should be 0.75 MPa and
can be fine adjusted by placing washers (9).
Lubricating valve (12) is adjusted to pressure
0.15…0.25 MPa and keeps oil pressure in GB
lubricating system. The valve is adjusted by
washers (11).
Operation 9.4.3. Adjusting front wheels toe-in
After required span of front wheels is set, toe-

in has to be adjusted by means of changing
length of steering tie-rod (2).
1. Bring air pressure in tires to rated value

(see table 7-22, section 7).
2. Drive tractor straight forward for several
meters on plane terrain, stop the tractor
and engage parking brake;
3. Measure distance “B” behind between
opposite points at rim edge at the height
of horizontal wheels’ axis.
4. Disengage parking brake, roll tractor
forward so that wheels turned by about
180 degrees and measure distance “A” in
front of FDA between the same measuring
points, as when measuring distance “B”.
Toe-in is set right, if size “A” is by 0…8
mm less than size “B”. If toe-in value
goes beyond given limits, make the
following adjustments:
I. FDA with two steering wheel hydraulic

cylinders:
 loosen tension of check nuts (1) and (3)
of steering tie-rod (2).
 By rotating the rod in both directions, set
required toe-in.
 Tighten check nuts.
II FDA with two-rod steering wheel hydraulic

cylinder:
 loosen check nuts (5) of steering tie-rods

(6);
 by rotating aligned spherical joint (4) (
both left and right side) set required toe-
in;
 torque check nuts to 70 N.m.
Operation 9.4.4. Adjusting external road

head lights ( on cabin railing)
 Place screen as shown in the figure.

 Measure distance between head lights’
centers directly on the tractor, and their
height from support surface, with air
pressure in tires in compliance with
recommended values. Mark centers of
head lights A-A1, B-B1, E-E1.;
 Put tractor on plain horizontal site
perpendicular to screen, 15 m away from
it till front head lights’ scatterers.
Longitudinal symmetry plane of the Screen marking and front head lights
tractor must intersect the screen along line adjustment:
0-01. A-A –line of head-lights’ centers;
 Switch on lower light and first adjust D-D – line of centers of light spots;
position of one head light ( cover the other O-O1 – line of screen symmetry;
one with dark cloth), and then the other B-B1 –vertical axis of left head light spot;
one, havinig loosened their fastening on E-E1 vertical axis of right head light spot;
the arm. C – distance between centers of exterior flash
 Head lights are properly adjusted, if line lights;
of spots’ centers D-D is half the distance h – distance from support surface to the center
from support surface to the line of centers of exterior flash lights.
of of head lights A-A (h/2).
Peculiarities of adjusting built-in road head

lights
 Put tractor at distance of 10 m from

scatterers to screen.
 Mark all dimensions, as given above.
 Head lights are properly adjusted, if light
spots are located higher, and line D-D is
150 mm lower than centers of head lights
A-A.
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual Section 10. Tractor storage
10. TRACTOR STORAGE

 Remove storage batteries, charge them
Before putting tractor to long-term storage, and put for storage in dry ventilated room
carry out the following operations: with temperature of 15…20 0C. Monthly
 Clean the tractor. check state of batteries and charge them.
 Put tractor under shelter or inside a room.
 Lubricate under pressure all greasing  Lower RMD to its lowest position.
points:  Loosen tension of generator and fan belts.
- FDA;  Cover exhaust pipe opening with sheath.
- HTDS;  Put tractor on supports to relive front and
- Clutch; rear tires. Reduce pressure in tires to 70%
- RMD. of the rated operation pressure.
 During storage at least once a month
 Drain cooling fluid from the diesel rotate crankshaft by several turns
cooling system. When re-starting tractor after prolonged
 Drain oil from diesel crankcase, fuel storage, fulfil the following operations:
pump body, clean rotor of the centrifugal  Take tractor off supports and bring air
oil filter. pressure in tires to normal.
 Drain oil from housings of power drive,  Refill fuel tanks.
oil HMS and HTDS tanks, wheel  Refill diesel with cooling fluid and oil.
reduction gears of FDA main drive, and Check oil level in all fill-in tanks.
fill in fresh oil with additive AKOR-1.  Place fully charged storage batteries.
 Fill in the diesel crankcase, fuel pump  Take sheath off the exhaust pipe.
body with oil K-17 (GOST – 10877-76),  Start the diesel and check if all
or fresh dried oil with 55 of additive instruments, controls an system function
AKOR –1 (GOST 15171-78). When using properly.
AKOR-1, carefully mix motor oil and an  Check functioning of light and sound
additive. alarm systems..
 Start the diesel. Let it function at small  Operate the unloaded tractor and make
rotation frequency for 15…30 s. sure it functions properly.
 Stop the diesel, drain conservation oil
from diesel crankcase and fuel pump.
MTZ 2022/2022V Section11. Supplements
11 SUPPLEMENTS
11.1.Diesel parameters to be adjusted
Table S-1
measurement
Oil pressure in the heated diesel lubrication system at MPa 0.28-0.45
rated frequency of crankshaft rotation Kgs/cm2 (2.8-4.5)
0
C
Cooling fluid temperature in the cooling system 80-95
mm
Drive belt sag at effort of 40 N (4 kgs) on branch between 29…33
generator and crankshaft pulleys
Clearance between rocker pin and end face of valve rod

with cold diesel, for valves: mm
- inlet mm 0.25…0.30
- exhaust 0.40-0.45
degree
Advance angle of fuel injection 19…21 YAZDA
Mpa 21…23 Motorpal
Pressure of needle rise start of the nozzle sprayer (kgs/cm 2) 21.6 +0.8
N.m (kgs.m) (220 +8)
Torque of main threaded connections:
 bolts of cylinder heads fixing 190-210 (19-21)

 bolts of main bearing 220-240 (22-24)
 nuts of connecting rod bearings bolts 100-120 (10-12)
 bolts of flywheel fastening 160-180 (16-18)
 bolts of nozzles fastening 160-200 (16-20)
 bolts of counterbalance fastening 100-120 (10-20)
160-00 (16-20)
 bolts of crankshaft pulley
35-50 (3.5-5-0)
 nuts of centrifugal oil filter cap
80-100 (8-10)
 bolts of torsion vibration damper 8-10 (0.8-1.0)
 fly-nuts of air purifier
*) For certified diesels – 16-18 (YAZDA), 17…19 (Motorpal)

**) with subsequent additional tightening to 30…35 N.m ((3… 3.5 kgs .m)
MTZ 2022/2022V Section 11. Supplements
11.2 PARAMETERS OF FUEL PUMPS TO BE ADJUSTED ON TEST STAND:

A. YAZDA (363.1111005-40.04)
Table S-2
measurement
1. Average cyclic fuel supply along high

pressure lines at rotation frequency 100 mm 2/cycle 140
rev/min, min
2. Rated frequency of cam shaft rotation rev/min 1050+10
3. Average cyclic fuel supply along high mm2/cycl 103…107
pressure pipelines at rated rotation frequency
4. Non-uniformity of fuel supply along high-
pressure pipelines at rated rotation frequency, % 6
max
5. Rotation frequency at regulator operation start
6. Complete automatic fuel supply shut down by rev/min 1075 + 10
the regulator in rotation frequency range
7. Average cyclic fuel supply by pump sections 1150
at rotation frequency:
- 800 0 10 rev/min
- 500 0 10 rev/min
8. Pressure of pneumatic corrector operation start
at n = 500 rev/min 120.5…126.5
9. Cyclic supply at rotation frequency 500 92.5…99.5
rev/min and absence of charging pressure Kg/cm 2 0.1…0.2
0.2…0.3
Mm 3/cycle 82…90
NOTE: Check parameters to be adjusted according to items 1…7 with forced switching off of
pneumatic corrector ( air pressure in the pneumatic corrector is 0.8…1.0 kgs/cm 2)
B. ‘MOTORPAL” (PP6M10P1F – 3493)

Table S2A
measurement
1. Geometric commencement of fuel delivery (as Mm 3.5 o 0.05
plunger moves).
2. Rated frequency of pump shaft rotation Rev/min 1050 o 10
3. Frequency of cam shaft rotation, corresponding to Rev/min 400 o 10
diesel idle run.
4. Non-uniformity of fuel delivery by pump sections at % %
rated rotation frequency, maximum
5. Non-uniformity of fuel delivery by pump sections in % %
the mode of minimal idle run, max
6. Frequency of pump cam shaft rotation , rev/min 1080…1090
corresponding to commencement of fuel supply
switch off through nozzles
7. Rotation frequency, corresponding to complete rev/min 1160…1170
automatic shut down of fuel supply through nozzles
8. Cyclic fuel delivery at frequency of pump camp
shaft rotation 100 rev/min mm 3/cycle 160 o 6
9. Cyclic fuel delivery at rotation frequency:
 1050 rev/min
 800 rev/min 116…120
 500 rev/min
3
mm /cycle 120.5…125.5
96.4…103.6
NOTES: 1. To check parameters use nozzles with sprayers Motorpal DOP 119S534.
2. Check parameters under item 9 at charging pressure 0.5 kgs/cm2
B. DISTRIBUTION-TYPE FUEL PUMP

Table S-2B
measurement
1. Average cyclic fuel delivery by high-pressure mm 3/cycle 180…250
pipelines at 40…100 rev/min
2. Rated frequency of camshaft rotation
3. Average cyclic fuel delivery by high-pressure rev/min 1050 + 5
pipelines at rated rotation frequency mm 3/cycle 104.4…107.6
4. Non-uniformity of fuel delivery by high-
pressure pipelines at rated rotation frequency, % 6
max.
5. Rotation frequency at regulator operation
commencement. rev/min 1080+5
6. Complete automatic fuel delivery shut down by
the regulator in the rotation frequency range. rev/min 1130…1170
7. Coefficient of fuel delivery correction at
rotation frequency of 725 + 25 rev/min. 1.09…1.15
8. Point of corrector operation commencement
should be in the rotation frequency range. rev/min 970…1030
9. Correction coefficient of cyclic delivery
10. Pressure of commencement of pneumatic
operation commencement kgs/cm 2 0.50…0.60
11. Cyclic delivery at rotation frequency of 500
rev/min and absence of charging pressure mm3/cycle 104…108
NOTE: Check parameters under items 1…8 with forced switching off pneumatic
corrector.
11.3. SPECIAL FEATURES OF DIESEL DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

Main and connecting rod necks and shells of
During diesel disassembly pull pistons in crankshaft bearings have two nominal
assembly with tie-rods only upwards. Before dimensions:
withdrawing piston, remove carbon deposit Table S-4
from the upper part of cylinder sleeve. Designatio Diameter of shaft neck, mm
When replacing parts of sleeve-piston group n
main Connecting rod
and crank mechanism, pay attention to
1H 85.25cc 00..085
dimension groups of parts. 104 73.00 cc 00..100
119
Cylinders’ sleeves and pistons are divided 2H c 0.085 c 0.100
85.00 c 0.104 72.75c 0.119
into three dimension groups (B, M, S) by
inside diameter and outside skirt diameter,
correspondingly. Crankshafts, connecting rod and main necks
Group designation is imprinted on the upper of which are manufactured according to the
sleeve clamp and piston bottom. second nominal value size, bear additional
designation on the first cheek:
Table S-3  “2K” – main necks of the second nominal
Group Sleeve Diameter of value;
Designati diameter,mm piston skirt mm  “2Ш’ – connecting necks of the second
on
nominal value size;
B 110 II 00..06 110 cc 00..05
04 07  “2КШ” – connecting rod and main necks
M I 0.04
110 I 0.02 c 0.07
110 c 0.09 of the second nominal value.
S 110I 0.02 110 cc 00..09
11
For one diesel assembly select pistons,

connecting rods and piston pins of one weight
group. Balance weight of connecting rods in
assembly with pistons should not exceed 30 g.
11.4. INSTALLATION OF PISTON

RINGS
On each diesel piston three rings are installed:

upper compression ring (1) of trapezoid type,
the second compression ring of coned type,
and oil-control ring of box type with spring
expander. Compression coned rings (2) on the
end face surface near the circlip bear marking
“top”, which during installation must face
piston bottom. Butt of oil control ring
expander must not coincide with ring circlip.
Put piston rings equally spaced along
circumference.
11.5. INSTALLATION OF
DISTRIBUTION MECHANISM GEARS
Install timing gears according marks they

bear. Align letter marks on intermediate gear
with corresponding marks of gears (6) of
crankshaft and (2) camshafts, and gears (4)
for driving fuel pump, as shown in the figure
to the right.
1 – gear for driving HTDS hydraulic pump. 2

– camshaft gear; intermediate gear; 4 – gear
for driving fuel pump; main for driving oil
pump; 6 – crankshaft gear.
11.6. SPECIFIC FEATURES OF

CLUTCH INSTALLATION AND
ADJUSTMENT
1. Install six bushings on flywheel pins.

2. Install driven discs (7) on both sides of
intermediate disc, with short ends of
bushings facing each other.
3. Install support disc (2) in assembly with
squeeze disc (1) In assembling discs use
technological bolts M12 x 45, screwing
them in squeezing disc (1) to the end of
the support one (2).
4. Center driven discs using mandrel and
unscrew technological bolts M12 x 45.
5. Adjust position of squeezing levers (5)
using nuts (4) to dimension 14 o 0.5 mm
from levers’ support surfaces to the end
face of support disc hub (6). Dimensional
difference for individual clutch levers
should not exceed 0.3 mm.
6. Secure adjustment nuts (4) with stop
plates (3).
11.7. SPECIFIC FEATURES OF ASSEMBLY AND ADJUSTMENT OF REAR AXLE

FINAL DRIVES
If parts and assembly units of final drives adjustment operations should be in the
need to be changed, subsequent assembly and following order:
 Assemble by a forced fit heated in oil washer and stop plate (3) in place. Torque
inside ring of outside bearing (10) on half- bolt to 500…550 N.m.
axle to the end inside bushing (7).  Check half-axle turning moment. If it
 Press-in outside rings of bearings (10, 11) exceeds given above limits, increase
in sleeve (6) to the end in sleeve bead. number of spacers, and visa versa.
 Install half-axle in assembly with inside  Secure stop plate bolt, having greased
ring of the outside bearing in the sleeve, plate surface, adjacent to washer, with
and put inside ring of inside bearing (11) grease Litol-24 or Bechem LCP-GM.
on half-axle. Nibs of plate must go into grooves of
 Put carrier in assembly (12) on half-axle , carrier (12). If required, screw bolt up
place washer (5) without a set of until a nib and groove align. Do not
adjustment spacers and tighten bolt (4) in unscrew the bolt. !
a way to select backlash in half-axle  Install crown gear (2).
bearings, and turning half-axle moment  Install sun gear (13) in assembly with
was within 3…5 N.m. shaft (1) in planetary gear carrier and
 Using a calliper square, measure distance check smoothness of rotation in assembly.
from half-axle end face to the outside  Install cover (8) in assembly with sealing
washer surface through an opening in ring, having greased the sealing ring and
washer (5). rubber ring with grease Litol-24 or
 Subtract washer thickness (12 mm) from Bechem LCP-GM. Tighten bolys of cover
measured value and calculate clearance fastening.
between washer and half-axle end face.
 Unscrew bolt (4), remove the washer and
fill in clearance with a set of spacers. Put

11.8. RECOMMENDED FUELS, OILS, LUBRICANTS/GREASES, FLUID AND THEIR

SUBSTITUTES
Table S-5
Description Air Grades Substitutes (duplicate)
temperature (main)
FUEL
Diesel From – 35 0 Diesel fuel 3- 3-0.5-35, 975-68 SAE (USA)
C 0, 2-35
Up to +5 0 C A-0.4, 3-0.2 Mil-F-16884F; DEF 2402B, sort 47/0 Die SO
from +5 0 C L-0.2- 40 (m) Mil –F-896, 1 klass;DEF-24021, 1 klass
up to +30 0 C L-0.4-40 (s) BS8269 (Britain);ASTM-D-W-F (USA)
OILS
Diesel From – 45 0
M-8DM M-8G 2k;Mobil ND 10W/20 (USA), HESSOL
C TURBO DIESEL SAE 15W/40 API CF-4;SHELL
up to +5 0C Novoil-M ROTELLA SX20W/20 (Britain); BELC –1; SAE
M-4/12G 10W-30 API; MOBIL DELVAC 1200 (USA)
From + 5 0 C M-10G 2k; M-10G 2; SHELL ROTELLA TX 30
to +40 0 C (Britain); HESSOL TURBO DIESEL SAE 15W-
M-10 DM 40 API CF-4 (Germany); MOBIL DELVAC XHP
SAE 15W –40 (Britain); SHELL ROTELLA SX30
(Britain); BRITISH PETROLIUM VANELUS OIL
SAE30 (Britain); ESSO ESTOR SDX SAE30
(USA); M7ADS 111 (Chechia)
Front PTO M10B 2 SAE 30; Essolube DX30; Mobil Delvac Oil 1230;
transmissio M10G 2 Rimula Oil 30 series 3; Energol Diesel 230
n M12 By
Front drive TCp-15K SAE 80/90; Spirax EP80/90; Gear oul 80/90GP
axle Tan-15 V Mobilube GX 80/90; Gear oil 80/90EP
Tad-18i
RMD Industrial oil M-8G 2k; I-30l; Hessoil Hydraulikoel HLP 32;
hydraulic Bechem m-G 2k; I-30A; Hessoil Hydraulikoil HLP 32
system; staroil # 32;
HTDS Bechem
Staroil #32
LUBRICANTS
Bearings: For all Litol 24 Beacon 3; Retinax A; Mobilux 3; Unedo 2,3;

temperatures Bechem LCP-GM ( TU RB 14733172.001)
Of clutch Fat cup
branches ; grease
Axles of Technical
FDA pins; cup grease
Axis of
FDA beam
oscillation;
Rotation
RMD shaft
; TCM
BRAKING FLUID
Tanks for Neva-M

control of (DOT-3;
brakes and DOT-4)
clutch
COOLING FLUID
Diesel OZH-40 or Tosol A-40N, AL-3SORTS-735 (Britain)
cooling OZH-65 Mil-F-5559 (BS 3150) (USA)
system (GOST
28084)
11.9. Circuit diagram
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operational manual
11.9(a) – Installation of road head-lights on lamps’ arms (version 1)
11.9 (b) – Installation of flash beacon (version 2)
11.9 (c) – Installation of heater EV 12-102 (version 3)

229-1
Designation Description Quantity Notes

X59.3, x59.4 Connector 602209 2
X59.1, xs 9.2, Connector 1-480672-0 4 AMP, Germany
xs9.5, xs9.6
Xs12.1, xs12.3 Socket SHS 32UK12G-M-7 2
XS 12.2 Socket SHS 32P12G-M-7 1
XS15.1 Socket SHSP15G-M-6 1
XS15.2 Socket SHS36U15G-M-6 1
XS13.1 Connector 602213 1
XT21 Panel P14.3723 TU RB 1
05882559.001-94
WA1 Aerial “Sputnic-003”SICM .
464621.005 TU
MTZ 2022/2022V – Operation manual
1.9.1 LIST OF COMPONENTS FOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 11.9
Table 11.9
Designation Description Quantity Notes
A1 Stereo tape recorder 1
A2 Plugs 6 Part of
engine set
A3 Control panel AP70.3709-01 TU AP 3813.001-98 1
BA1, BA1 Loudspeaker Part of

recorder
set
BK1 Sensor DUTZH-02M TU RB 07513211.001-95 1
BK2 Temperature sensor 233.3828 tu37.459.259-00 1
BN1 Fuel level sensor 38 0164 45 004 1 KMGU,

Hungary
BP1 Pressure gauge DD-6M TU RB 600417525.009-2000 1
BP2 Pressure gauge DD-10-01M TU RB 600417525.009- 1

2000
BP3 Pressure gauge DD-20M TU RB 600417525.009-200 1
BV1,BV2 Speed sensor AP71.3843 TU AP 3843.002-2000 2
E1,E2 Road head-light 08 7101 000 TU RB 28927023.003- 2
98
E3, Operation headlight 8724.304.301 TU RB 4
E4,E10,E11, 28927023.003-98
E12
E5 Cabin illumination ceiling light 0.50.09.814 1
E13 License plate illumination lamp FP131-AP GOST 1
6964-72
E6, E7 Operation head-light 8424.302/4 TU RB 2
28927023.003-98
E14, E15 Road head-light 05.524.00 2
EL1,EL2 Lamp HS4-60/55 2 Part of
lamps set
E1,E2
EL4-EL15 Lamp A12-5 7 Part of set
HL1…
EL3,7,13,16 Lamp AKG 12-55-1 4 Part of set
E3…
EL8,11,12,17 Lamp A12-21-3 7 Part of set
,19,20,22 HL4-6
EL18,24 Lamp 12-10 2 Part of set
F1 Box of fuses BP-4 TY RB 03428193.095-97 1
F2 Box of fuses BP-3-01 TU RB 03428193.095-97 1
F3 Box of fuses BP-11 TU RB 03428193.095-97 1
F4 Box of fuses BP –1-01 TU RB 03428193.095-97 1
F5 Box of fuses BP –1-01 TU-RB 03428193.095-97 1
FU2,FU3 Fuse 25A 2
G1 Generator AAN 5506, 14B,150A 1
GB1,GB2 Storage battery 12V-120A/h TT 80-3700080D 1
HA1 Sound alarm device C308 TU 37.003.1063-81 1
HA2 Sound alarm device C309 TU-37.003.1063-81 1
HA3 Alarm relay 733.3747 TU 37.003.074-76 1
HG1 Box of control lamps AP10.3803 TU AP 3803.—1-99 1
HL1…HL3 Road train head-light UP 101-G1 GOST 6964-72 3
HL4,HL5 Head light 3713.3712 TU RB 05882559.010-95 2
HL6,HL7 Head light 7303.3716 TU RB 05882559.010-95 2
K1 Plugs’ relay 161.3777 TU 37.476.013-2005 1
K2,6…11 Relay 902.3747-10 TU 37.003.1418-94 1
K3,K4 Relay 902.3747-20 TU 37 003.1418-94 2
K5 Relay 738 3747-30 TU 37.003.1417-93 1
KH1 Breaker of parking brake control lamp PC492 TU 1
37.003.1052-81
KH2 Breaker of turn indicator 8586.6/0031 TU 8586.6/0031 1
Tla
KT1 Box of plugs MUCH-01 1
M2 Starter AZF 4617 TU 1
M3 Windshield washer 122.5208 TU 37.459.176094 1
M4 Drive 961.5205100 GOST 18699-70 1
F2 Box of fuses BP3-01TU RB 03428193.095-97 1
F3 Distribution unit ANP-BP-60 1
F5 Box of fuses BP-2-01 TU RB 034 28193.095-97 1
FU1 Fuse 1 Part of
recorder
FU2 Fuse 15A 1 Part of
wiring
G1 Generator AAN 5120 (14 V, 70-150A) 1
GB1,GB2 Storage battery 12V, 120 Ah 1
HA1 Sound alarm, horn C 308 TU 37.003.1063-81 1
HA2 Sound alarm, horn C 309 TU 37.003.1063-81 1
HA3 Signal relay 733.3747 TU 37 003.074-76 1
HA4 Sound alarm device 20.3721-01 1
HG1 Box of control lamps AP10.3803 1
HL1…HL3 Road train head light FA-1 GOST 6964-72 3
HL4,HL5 Front head light 3713.3712 TURB 05882559.010-95 2
HL6,HL7 Rear head light 7303.3716 TU RB 05882559.010-95 2
HL8 Alarm beacon MC-2-12-0 TU RB 07526946.049-93 1
K1 Relay 16.3777 TU 37.459.280-2001 1
K3 Relay 738.3747-30 TU 37.469.023-97 1
KH1 Breaker of parking brake control lamp PC492 TU 1 Can be
37.003.1052-81 changed
with ERP-
1
KH2 Breaker of turn indicators 8586.6/0031 TU 1
8586.6/0031 Tla
KT1 Unit of BUS-1 TY RB 28981749.003-2000 1
KT2 Box of plugs 1
UZ1 Voltage converter 191.3759-01 TU84.214.008-02 1
XA9.1 Socket P9-1 TU RB 334210.020-97 1
Pin connectors
XP11- Receptacle 502601 13
XP1.13
XP2.1-XP2- Receptacle 502602 10
10
XP4.1 Receptacle 502604 1
XP9.1- Receptacle 1-480673-00 4 AMP,
XP.9.4 Germany
XP12.1, Plug SHC 32P12SH –M-7 2
XP12.3
XP12.2 Plug SHC32PK12SH-M-7 1
XP151,XP15. Plug SHC36PK15SH-M-6 2
2
Female receptacles
XS1.1…XS1. Receptacle 602601 16

16
XS2.1 Receptacle 602602 9
XS 2.6 Receptacle 601202 11
KT2 Relay 90.3747 TU 37.003.14 18-94 7
M1 Fan EVI12-1 02 TU RB 500135046.002-2001 1
M2 Windshield wiper 96.5205 GOST 18699-73 1
M3 Starter AZF 4617 1
M4 Windshield washer 96.5205 GOST 18699-73 1
M5 Windshield wiper T240-5205 TU 213.201.027-01 1
M6 Electric motor 9742.3730 TU 37.459.125-91 1
P1 Tachometer-speedometer AP70.3813 TU AP 1
3813.001-98
QS1 “Ground” switch TU RB 07513211.006-97 1
R1 Additional resistor CD-50 1
SA1 Switch 676.00.00/R TU RB 213.20.005-97 1
SA2 Switch P150M-07.28 TU RB 14795799.001-97 1
SA3-11 Switch P150M-07.28 TU 213.201.005-97 5
SA6 Switch BK 12-31 TU RB 37334210.004-97 1
SA7 Switch, under steering wheel PKP-3A TU RB 1
37334210.027-98
37334210.027-98
SA9 Switch P147M-04.29 TU RB 14795799.001-97 1
SA10 Switch of starter and devices 1202.3704-03 1
SA12 Switch P147M-02.03 TU RB 14795799.001-97 1
SA14 Switch P147M –04.11 TU RB 14795799.001-97 1
SB1 Switch 245.3710 TU 37.469.019-96 1
SB2 Switch VK12-21 TU RB 07512465.017-94 1
SB3 Switch VK409 TU RB 37.003.478-76 1
SK1 Sensor DATZH TU RB 07513211.011-97 1
SL1 Sensor braking fluid emergency level AP 23.3829 1
SP1 Sensor of air-conditioner switching on 1 Part of
conditione
r set
A5 Valve of fuel dresser 1
BK1 Sensor of cooling fluid temperature indicator DUTZH- 1
02M TU RB 07513211.001-95
BP1 Sensor of oil pressure DD-6M TU RB 6004 1
17525.009-2000
BP2 Sensor of air pressure DD-10-01M TU RB 1
600417525.009-2000
BP3 Sensor of oil pressure in KPP DD-20M TU RB 1
600417525.009-2000
BN1 Sensor of fuel level indicator 38 0164 45 004 1 KMGY
BV1,BV3 Speed sensor PM 71.384-02 TU BY 190245592.001- 3
2006
E1,E2 Road head light 08 7101 000 TU RB 78927023.004- 2
2004
E3,E4 Operation head light 8724.304/301 TU RB 6
28927023.003-98
E5 Cabin illumination ceiling lamp 025009814 1
E6,E7 Road head light 8724.304/4 TU RB 28927023.004-03 2
E8 Lamp of license plate illumination FP131AP GOST 1
6964-72
EL1,EL2 Lamp AKG12-60+55-1 2 Part of set
EL4 Lamp A12-5 7 Part of set
EL9 Lamp A12 –21-3 6 Part of set
EL3 Lamp AKG12 –55-1 8 Part of set
EL8 Lamp AC12-10 1 Part of set
MS Motor reduction gear 475.3730 000 TU 37.459.155- 1
93
P1 Tachometer- speedometer AP70.3813.001-98 1
P2 Combination of devices AP72.3801 TU AP 3801.005- 1
98
QS1 Switch 1212.3737-06 TU RB 07513211.006-97 1
R1 Additional resistor CD-50 (50 Ohm, 4W) 1
SA1 Switch P150-25.16 TU RB 14795799.001-97 1
SA2 Switch P150M –07.28 TU RB 14795799.001-97 1
SA3… Switch P150M-25.52 TU RB 14795799.001-97 4
1000093400.001-2001
37334210.023-98
SA8 Switch P147M-04.29 TU RB 14795.799.01-97 1
SA9 Switch 1202.3704-03 TU 37.003.780-76 1
SA11 Switch BK343M-0188 TU RB 14795799.001-97 1
SA12 Switch BK12-21 TU RB 14795799.001-97 1
SB1-SB3 Switch BK 12-21 TU RB 37334210.015-97 3
SB5 Switch of emergency alarm 1
SB4 Switch BK12-1 TU RB 07512465.017-94 1
SB6 Switch BK 409 TU 37.003.478-76 1
SK1 Sensor DATZH TU RB 07513211.011-97 1
SL1 Level sensor AP23.3839 TU AP 3839.001-01 1
SP1 Sensor DCF-65 TU RB 07513211.003-97 1
SP2 Sensor DADM-03 TU RB 075132211.004-94 3
SP4 Sensor DADV TU RB 07513211.004-94 1
A1 Stereo tape recorder
BA1,BA2 Loud speaker IZHSK 467286.002 2 Part of set

FU1 Fuse 1 -“-
A2 Sparking plugs 6 -“-
A4 Air conditioner MT-8100000 “Ebershpekher” 1
A4.1 Air processing assembly 1 Part of set
A4.1.1 Regulator of outlet air temperature 1
M1 Fan electric motor 1
S1 Switch of fan modes 1
A4.2 Compressor –capacitor unit 1 Part of air
conditione
r set
YC Compressor electromagnetic clutch 1
A 4.3 Box of pressure sensors 1 -“-
SP1 Minimum pressure sensor 1 (4kgs/cm2
)
SP1 Maximum pressure sensor 1 (12
kgs/cm2)
SPI Maximum pressure sensor 1 (16
kgs/cm2)
SP2, SP4 Sensor DADM-03 TU RB 07513211.004-94 2
SP3 Sensor DCF-65 TU RB 07513211.011-97 1
SP5 Sensor DADV TU RB 07513211.004-94 1
SP6 Sensor MM 111D-01 TU 37.003.546-76 1
UZ1 Voltage converter 191.3759 TU 84.214.008-02 1
Pin receptacles OST 37.003.032-88
XP 1.1… 502601 11
XP 2.1 502602 9
XP 4.1… 502604 2
XP6.1 502606 1
Female receptacles OST 37.003.032-88
XS 1.1 602601 17
XS 2.1 601202 4
XL 2.6 601202 3
XS 2.4 602602 4
XS 2.10 Sc 5.601.202 1
Pin receptacles OST 37.003.032-88
XS3.1 601203 4
XS 4.1 602604 3
XS 5.1 602605 7
XS 5.6 469.59.00.00 2
XS 5.12 602205 1
XS 6.1 602606 3
XS 6.4 602606-XX-10 1
XS 7.1 602207 3
XS 8.1 602608 7
XS 8.8 610608 1
XS 9.2 602209 2
XS 9.1 Receptacle AMP 1-480673-0 3
XA 9.1 Socket P9-1 TU RB 334210.020-98 1
XP 12.1 Plug SHR 32PK ESH1H 0 PO 364.028 TU 3
XP 15.1 Plug SHR 36P15H4H-0 PO 364.028 TU 1
XP 12.1 Socket SHR32PK12EG1H-0 PO 364 028 TU 1
XS 15.1 Socket SHR 36 CK 15HG4H-0 PO 364.028 TU 1
WA1 Aerial 1
Wires colors
Г – blue, Ж – yellow, З -green
К –red, Кч – brown, О – orange
Р –rosy, С –grey, Ф -violet
Ч -black
1. Switch of DL control 13 Relay of FDA switching on
2. Switch of FDA control 14 Receptacle
3. Sound alarm button 19 Electric magnet of FDA hydraulic
4. Lamp of FDA signal distributor
5. Lamp of DL signal 20 Electric magnet of DL hydraulic
6, 7 Relay of left side brake distributor
8, 9 Relay of right side brake 21 Sensor of automatic FDA control
10,16,17 – Diode 22 Reverse sensor
11 – Capacitor 23 , 24 , 28 Connecting receptacle
12- Box of fuses 24 Sensor of front wheels turning angle
11 Relay of DL switching on (for DL)
12 Reverse relay
11.10 Electric diagram of the control system of rear axle DL and FDA
В щиток прибора – to device panel

После запуска дизеля- +12V after diesel start
К датчику левого тормоза- to sensor of left side brake
К датчику правого тормоза- to sensor of right side brake
К лампе БД ЗМ- to RA DL lamp
К звуковому сигналу – to sound alarm
Панель управления БД и ПВМ – control panel of DL and FDA
К системе управления навесным устройством Бош- to control system of mounting mechanism
BOSCH
11.11 Electrical diagram of control system of gear box reduction gear
Панель управления БД…- control panel for DL, FDA and reduction gear
Из щитка приборов – from instrument panel
К системе управления БД…- to control system of DL and FDA
К системе управления…- to control system of mounting mechanism BOSCH.
1 – Relay of switching on lower degree

2 – Signal lamp of lower degree
3. – Signal lamp of higher degree
4,5 Relay of switching on higher degree
6 – box of fuses
7 – Diode
8 – Resistor
9,14 Connecting receptacle
10 – Electromagnet of reduction gear hydraulic distributor
11 – Pressure sensor of lower degree
12. Pressure sensor of higher degree
13– Sensor of GB neutral position
11 – LED of lower degree alarm
16 LED of higher degree alarm
17- Button of switching on lower degree
18- Button of switching on higher degree
11.12. Kinematic diagram of the tractor (see page 234)
- Дизель - diesel;
- Компрессор кондиционера - compressor of air conditioner;
- Муфта сцепления - clutch;
- Шина пневматическая - pneumatic tires
- Насос - pump;
- Остановочный тормоз (совмещен со стояночным) - stop brake (combined with parking brake)
- Задний мост - rear axl
Gear ratios of GB, FDA, PTO and rocker bearings (see kinematic diagram on page 233)
Gear ratios of main gears

Ranges Gears Gears in engagement Gear ration speed
of
Gear Trans
missi
move
ment
box on (km/h)
II
III
Forward movement
IV
II
FDA gear ratios
Gears in Gear ratio Total gear

engagement ration
Drive
Main pair
Wheel
reduction
gear
Rear axle
Main pair
Side gear
Final drive
Rear PTO drive

Gears in Gear Shank
engagement ratio revers
e, min-
1*
Independent
Rear PTO
* at rated engine speed (2100 rev/min)
Rocker bearings
Pos. Designation in Quan Po Designation in Qu
No. catalogue tity s. catalogue ant
per No ity
tract . per
or tra
cto
r

Belarus 2022 User Manual Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Belarus 2022 User Manual Eng

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Belarus 2022 User Manual Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main components described in the manual?

What are the main components described in the manual?

What safety precautions are operators advised to follow?

What safety precautions are operators advised to follow?

MTZ

Editor-in-Chief – Chief Designer - M.G. Meleshko

Tractors MTZ 2022/2022V. Operation manual / V.G.Levkov/

© Minsk Tractor Works RUE, 2003

TO SHIFT THE RANGE:

- press the clutch pedal;

Abbreviations and symbols:

DAI - differential automatic interlock;

See the manual

Parking brake Slowly

Fuel Battery charging

Plug of pre-start heater Side lights

Diesel engine revolutions Turn light

diesel oil pressure Headlight

Diesel coolant temperature Lower light

On/start up Differential lock

Lever down Front drive axle is on

External cylinder “ extending”

External cylinder “ pull-in”

Trailer turn signal

Air pressure in the pneumatic system Oil pressure in HTDS

Braking fluid level in tanks of main

1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS IN TRANSPORTATION AND REACTIVATION

1.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR TRACTOR’S TECHNICAL CONDITION

1.4.14. After disconnecting PTOS driven

1.4.28. When operating on slopes, increase  check brakes functioning;

TL voltage, 11 20- 110 154- 330-

1.4. 38. Don’t allow operation with heavy

1.5. SAFETY REGULATIONS DURING

1.5.1. During transportation works observe

1.6. SAFETY REGULATIONS DURING

1.6.1. Maintenance should be carried out on

1.6.6. The tools and appliances used for

1.7. FIRE SAFETY REGULATIONS 1.8. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS IN

1.8.2. During storage the tractor should be

1.9. HYGIENE REQUIREMENTS

1.9.1. First aid kit should be supplied with

Two fuel tanks with total capacity of 357 l are

SERIES NUMBERS OF TRACTOR’S

The company’s plate with series numbers of

Series number of the tractor is duplicated on

Series diesel number is duplicated on the

Series number of the diesel turbo-compressor.

Clutch series number.

Series chassis number is punched on the right

Series FDA number is punched on the FDA

The cabin series number and number of the

Front view Rear view

Description Unit of measurement Value

Drive - Four-speed, independent

End rotation frequency

Pressure of safe valve adjustment Mpa 20 -2.0 (200 –20)

Reversible steering post (2022V)

Continuation of table 3.1

Tachometer-speedometer Electrical ( complete with programming panel)